B E aai 3Efi 
 
rLBOROUQH-8 SELF-TAUGHT series 
 
 ■[arT\U Grammar 
 Self-Taught. 
 
 (In Tamil and Roman Charaotebs.) 
 
 Second Edition 
 
 BY 
 
 Don M. de ZILVA WICKREMASFNQHE, 
 
 Epigraphist io the Ceylon Governvtent ; 
 Librarian and Assisiatit Keeper of the Indian Institute^ Oxford. 
 
 Author of 
 " Tamil Self-Taught," and " Sinhalese Self-Taught."" 
 
 Companion Volume; 
 "Tamil Self-Taught. *» 
 
 London : 
 MARLBOROUGH & Co., 51, Old Bailey, E.G. 4. 
 
 tAlt Rights Reserved.] 
 
TO 
 
 Te^ Eev. G. U. pope, m.a., d.d., 
 
 I DEDICATE THESE PAGES 
 
 AS A TOKEN 
 
 OF SINCERE GRATITUDE FOR ASSISTANCE 
 
 RECEIVED 
 
 IN MY TAMIL AND TELUGU STUDIES. 
 
 M. DE Z. WiCKREMASINGHE. 
 
Pi Li^c;-^ 
 
 PREFACE. 
 
 )°l^h 
 
 The present work is chiefly intended for the use of those who wish 
 to acquire a knowledge of the grammar of colloquial Tamil within a 
 comparatively short time, either Tor practical purposes or as the 
 preliminary to a thorough study of the language. 
 
 Particularly bearing in mind students who work without a teacher, 
 I have devoted some pages wholly to the subject of pronunciation, and 
 have given the transliteration of all the Tamil words occurring in the 
 grammar, side by side with the native character. This will enable 
 the beginner gradually to acquire the Tamil character as he proceeds 
 with the study of the grammar itself, thereby avoiding a needless waste 
 of time and trouble. 
 
 The chapter on euphonic changes will specially appeal to those 
 who ha\e a philological turn of mind ; for this gives the key to the 
 solution of many difficulties that beset an ordinary student in the way 
 of analysing Tamil words and sentences and of mastering their 
 relationship to one another. 
 
 1 have added a few exercises in translation into and from the 
 Tamil, followed by a key ; also a Tamil-English vocabulary containing 
 not only all the words found in the text of the grammar and in the 
 exercises but also very many others that are in common use. For a 
 regular series of progressive exercises in the Tamil character the 
 student is referred to Dr. Pope's Handbook, published by the Oxford 
 Clarendon Press. 
 
 Such are the scope and the arrangement of the present work, and 
 it only remains for me now to acknowledge my manifold indebtedness 
 lo Dr. G. U. Pope, who has guided my Tamil and Telugu studies, and 
 to whom this work is dedicated. My thanks are also due to the 
 present editor of the Self-Taught Series of Languages, for many 
 valuable suggestions and emendations. 
 
 M. DE ZILVA WICKREMASINGHE. 
 
 Indian Institute, 
 
 Oxford, September, 1906. 
 
 P.S. — A companion volume, " Tamil Self-Taught," will be 
 published shortly, and will include an English-Tamil alphabetical 
 vocabulary, in addition to a large number of vocabularies and con- 
 versations classified according to subject. These two works will 
 ■enable one speedily to acquire as much Tamil as is necessary for 
 business purposes, and also to lay a scientific foundation for the serious 
 study of Tamil literature. 
 
 304 
 
PBEPATORY NOTE 
 By the Rev. G. U. Pope, m.a., d.d. 
 
 The author of this grammar has asked me to write » 
 few words of introduction to it. It gives me much pleasure- 
 to say that on carefully examining it I find that it gives a 
 very correct and lucid summary of the chief facts of the 
 spoken language, and that it will be a valuable introduction, 
 to the larger books. It cannot be too strongly impressed, 
 upon the student that every word must be connected in the- 
 mind with some useful sentence, which must be repeatedly 
 written and pronounced. Nothing will compensate for the 
 absence of this mechanical drill. It is of real importance 
 that the student should carefully note the pronunciation of 
 the Tamil character ^ when it occurs singly in the middle 
 of a word, as explained on page 9 ; otherwise the use of 
 the transliterative symbol d for this sound of the letter 
 might be a stumbling-blojk. I sincerely hope that the book 
 may have a wide circulation ; and that in any future edition^ 
 ill may be substituted for d, 
 
 G. U. P. 
 
 Oxford, 1906. 
 
CONTENTS. 
 
 PART I. 
 
 GRAMMAR and SYNTAX. 
 
 PAOE 
 
 The Alphabet and Pronunciation ... ... ... 7 
 
 Vowels ... ... ... ... ... ... 8 
 
 Consonants ... ... ... ... ... ... 9 
 
 SylJabics ... ... ... ... ... ... 11 
 
 Conventional Characters ... ... ... ... 13 
 
 Phonetic Pronunciation of Tamil ... ... ... 14 
 
 Rules of Euphony ... ... ... ... ... 17 
 
 The Sounds of the Tamil Alphabet ... ... ... 18 
 
 Vowels with Vowels ... ... ... ... ... 19 
 
 Vowels with Consonants ... ... ... ... 20 
 
 Consonants with Vowels ... ... ... ... 21 
 
 Consonants with Consonants ... ... ... ... 21 
 
 The Pauts of Speech ... ... ... ... ... 25 
 
 Articles ... ... ... ... ... ... 25 
 
 Nouns ... ... ... ... ... ... 25 
 
 Gender and Number ... ... ... ... ... 25 
 
 Declension ... ... ... ... ... ... 27 
 
 Pronouns ... ... ... ... ... ... 29 
 
 Personal ... ... ... ... ... ... 29 
 
 Demonstrative ... ... ... ... ... 32 
 
 Interrogative ... ... ... ... ... 34 
 
 Reflexive ... ... ... ... ... ... .34 
 
 Distributive... ... ... ... ... ... 34 
 
 Adjectives ... ... ... ... ... ... 35 
 
 Derivative Nouns ... ... ... ... ... 36 
 
 Numerals ... ... ... ... ... ... 88 
 
 Cardinals ... ... ... ... ... ... 38 
 
 Ordinals ... ... ... ... ... ... 40 
 
 Fractions ... ... ... ... .... ... 41 
 
 Verbs 41 
 
 Tenses ... ... ... ... ... ... 41 
 
 The Negative ... ... ... ... ••• 44 
 
 Models ... ... ... ... ... ... 47 
 
6 CONTENTS. 
 
 Verbs, continued. 
 
 PAGE 
 
 Participles ... ... ... ... ... ... 5^^ 
 
 Verbal and Abstract Nouns ... ... ... ' ... 55- 
 
 Infinitive Mood ... ... ... ... ... 58 
 
 Imperative Mo6"d ... ... ... ... ... 59 
 
 Potential, Optative, and Desideiative Verbal Forms ... 60 
 
 Verbal Forms signifying Condition and Concession ... 62 
 
 Auxiliary and Defective Verbs ... ... ... 61 
 
 Passive Voice ... ... ... ... ... 67 
 
 Causative and Denominative Verbs ... ... ... 68' 
 
 Adverbs ... ... ... ... ... ^ ... 69 
 
 Postpositions ... ... ... ... ... ... 69 
 
 Conjunctions ... ... ... ... ... ... 70 
 
 Interrogatives ... ... ... ... ... ... 71 
 
 Emphatic Particles ... ... ... ... ... 72 
 
 Interjections ... ... ... ... ... ... 73 
 
 Syntax ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 74 
 
 Subject ... ... ... ... ... ... 74 
 
 Object ... ... ... ... ... ... 75 
 
 Predicate ... ... ... ... ... ... 76 
 
 Adverbial Clauses ... ... ... ... ... 77 
 
 Comparison ... ... ... ... ... ... 73 
 
 Quotations ... ... ... ... ... ... 79 
 
 Ellipsis ... ... ... ... „, ,.. 80 
 
 PART II. 
 
 EXERCISES 81 
 
 KEY to the Exercises ... ... ... ... ,„ 85 
 
 PART III. 
 TAMIL- ENGLISH VOCABULARY ... ' 91 
 
TAMIL GRAMMAR SELF-TAUGHT, 
 
 Part I. 
 GRAMMAR with SYNTAX. 
 
 The Alphabet and Pronunciation. 
 
 1. The Tamil language is spoken by more than sixteeo 
 millions of people, who form the principal inhabitants of the 
 extreme south-eastern portion of India and of the Northern 
 Province of Ceylon, irrespective of the large Tamil communi- 
 ties found in the tea-plantations and other agricultural and 
 industrial centres of Burma, Ceylon, West Indies, Straits 
 Settlements, <fcc. 
 
 2. Its alphabet is derived from the Brahml script employed 
 in the ancient inscriptions of India, and consists of thirty 
 primary letters — twelve vowels and eighteen consonants. 
 The so-called secondary letters consist mostly of the various* 
 combinations of consonants with vowels. 
 
 3. Strictly speaking, there are only five primary vowel- 
 sounds, namely a, i, w, e, and o. These, together with their 
 long forms d, i, u, e, and o, and the two diphthongs ai and 
 au, make up the twelve. 
 
 These vowels are written in two different ways. When 
 they are initial, they are represented separately by regular 
 letters; but when they are medial, that is to say, when a 
 vowel is pronounced immediately after a consonant, the 
 former is shown by one or more vowel signs attache' I to the 
 consonant. The short vowel a, however, being inherent in 
 the consonant, is not indicated by any sign. Hence, its. 
 absence is generally (though not always in MSS.) marked by 
 a dot or a small circle over the consonant; e.g. -s = ka, but 
 «=&; u=pa, and u=p. 
 
« VOWELS. 
 
 4. Vowels or uyir-eruttugal ('* life-letters ") : — 
 
 Tamil Characters. 
 
 |i 
 
 
 Pronxuiciation. Phonetic 
 
 
 
 c -^ 
 
 
 Initial. 
 
 MediHl. 
 
 r 
 
 
 Signs.* 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 at 
 
 Like 
 
 u ill cw^, or a in America 
 
 u,ii 
 
 ^ 
 
 "■» O 
 
 a 
 
 5> 
 
 a in rather or car 
 
 ah 
 
 ^ 
 
 S 
 
 it 
 
 )) 
 
 i in »i^ 
 
 i 
 
 fFor^ 
 
 r» 
 
 U 
 
 »> 
 
 i in routine, or ee in mee^ 
 
 ee 
 
 a. 
 
 G» h ^ 
 
 u 
 
 »» 
 
 ?< in /m^, or oo in good... 
 
 Wiien final, it is pro- 
 nounced very slightly, 
 and often like i. 
 
 u 
 
 ■-f>err 
 
 O' cJ>j «^» -^ 
 
 u 
 
 »» 
 
 u in rule, or oo in fool... 
 
 00 
 
 SJ 
 
 Q 
 
 e| 
 
 M 
 
 e in e/feow 
 
 e 
 
 -^ 
 
 (? 
 
 
 >» 
 
 a in flfeZe, ^a?ie 
 
 Wlien initial, the short 
 and long e are pro- 
 nounced like ye in 
 
 ay 
 
 9 
 
 60), I 
 
 Q /r 
 
 ai 
 ai 
 
 
 
 
 yes and yea respec- 
 tively ye,yay 
 
 ai in aisle, or ei in height i 
 When final, it is invari- 
 ably pronounced like ei 
 
 in t;e/Z ay 
 
 in pot 
 
 ^ 
 
 (?/r 
 
 
 
 t* 
 
 in 7ioble 
 
 oh 
 
 ^etr 
 
 O etr 
 
 au 
 
 J» 
 
 oiv in now 
 
 ow 
 
 * These phonetic signs are employed in the third column on dp. 
 15-17. 
 
 t ^ a before nr r, eo I, (sii I, i^ r, m n, and sm n, at the end of a 
 polysyllabic word, is pronounced somewhat like e in 'pen. 
 
 X Before the cerebrals iL d, zsur n, tp r, dr /, and /^ r, these vowels 
 Are pronounced with some modification, as a " modified vowel " (umlaut) 
 •in German. 
 
CONSONANTS. 9 
 
 5. Consonants or mey-eruttugal (" body-letters ") : — 
 
 Tamil 
 
 Charac 
 
 tors. 
 
 Trans- 
 literation. 
 
 Pronunciation. 
 
 Phonetic 
 Signs. 
 
 ft 
 
 
 Like k in kite when initial, doubled, mute, 
 
 or immediately after lL t or p t 
 Like g in regard in all other instances ... 
 When iutervocal, in Ceylon 
 
 JAkQ ng in song 
 
 When doubled, or after iL or /d, it has 
 the sound of ch in church 
 
 Alter @ rl it is pronounced like j 
 
 In the case of words borrowed from San- 
 skrit, it generally retains the sound of 
 the original letter. 
 
 In all other instances it is between » in 
 8un and sh in short 
 
 Like ny in Bunyan (the Spanish n) 
 When followed by y, like ng soft 
 
 Ks din door 
 
 When mute or doubled, it has the sound 
 of t in hut 
 
 Cerebral* n uttered with the tip of the 
 tongue turned up and drawn back so 
 as to touch the roof of the dome of the 
 palate 
 
 Wlien initial, mute, or doubled, it has 
 a sound between that of th in Thames 
 and th in theory. 
 
 In all other instances it is pronounced 
 like the English ih in the words then, 
 these 
 
 In Sanskrit derivatives it more or less 
 retains the sound of the original. 
 
 k 
 h 
 
 ch 
 J 
 
 sh 
 
 ny 
 
 ng 
 
 d 
 
 th 
 
 th 
 
 • "Cerebral' 
 mouth. 
 
 indicatei sounds made high np in the roof of the 
 
10 
 
 CONSONANTS. 
 
 Tsmil 
 
 Cliniac- 
 
 ters. 
 
 Trans- 
 literation. 
 
 Pronunciation. Phonetic 
 Signs. 
 
 ^ 
 
 n 
 
 JjikQn'mnut ... ... 
 
 n 
 
 
 ; p 
 I ^ 
 
 Like_p when initial, mute, or doubled ... 
 
 I 
 
 u 
 
 Like h when intervoeal 
 
 
 (In Sanskrit derivatives it often retains 
 
 
 
 
 the sound of the original letter.) 
 
 
 ih 
 
 m 
 
 As in English 
 
 m 
 
 lb 
 
 y 
 
 do. do 
 
 J 
 
 IT 
 
 r 
 
 do. do. ... 
 
 r 
 
 eb 
 
 1 
 
 do. do. 
 
 1 
 
 €U 
 
 V 
 
 do. do 
 
 V 
 
 iP 
 
 r 
 
 A cerebral having the combined sound of 
 r and soft I, and pronounced by turn- 
 ing up the tip of the tongue as far 
 
 
 
 
 back as possible 
 
 T 
 
 
 
 In Ceylon, however, it is pronounced like 
 
 
 
 
 an ordinary English I 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 In the Tamil country it has often the 
 
 
 
 
 sound of the s mpleasure (the French.^) 
 
 
 err 
 
 I 
 
 A cerebral / 
 
 I 
 
 
 1 I 
 
 A hard, vibrating, half- palatal, half- 
 
 
 P 
 
 
 rerebral r 
 
 IT 
 
 
 1 t 
 
 When mute or doubled, it is pronounced t 
 
 t 
 
 eisr 
 
 n 
 
 Nearly the English n 
 
 n 
 
 
 
 SOT /D wra is pronounced wc?ra 
 
 ndra 
 
 • 0, cSfu 
 
 h 
 
 This letter is called the dydam, and is 
 pronounced like ch in the Scotch word 
 loch. It is u^ed in poetry, when 
 
 
 
 
 necessary for the metre 
 
 ch 
 
 6. The following table shows how the twelve medial-vowel 
 signs are attached to the foregoing eigliteen consonants, 
 tliereby producing 216 syllabic characters : — 
 
SYLLAHiCS. 
 
 11^ 
 
 (Continued over,) 
 
 Cox- 
 
 BONAJfTS, 
 
 Absence 
 of dot = 
 
 a 
 
 a 
 
 i 
 
 i 
 
 u 
 
 (g kii 
 
 u 
 
 & k 
 
 <« ka 
 
 <^fT kd 
 
 9iki 
 
 S kl 
 
 cffiL ku 
 
 ik n 
 
 IE] iia 
 
 fEin nd 
 
 IhSl 111 
 
 f^ III 
 
 Ibj iiu 
 
 ^ nil 
 
 *5 
 
 •SF ga 
 
 s'lr Qd 
 
 , 9^1 
 
 ^ gi 
 
 •Br Qll 
 
 <'S '^w 
 
 © n 
 
 (^5 iia 
 
 (Cj/r ild 
 
 (s^ ni 
 
 <^ iii 
 
 j5/ rlu 
 
 ^F ni't 
 
 '^4 
 
 L- d<i 
 
 t—[T dd 
 
 LQ. di 
 
 U2. di 
 
 ® du 
 
 (§ da 
 
 eisr n 
 
 €m na 
 
 1^1 nd 
 
 6e3n ni 
 
 SQ^f 7ll 
 
 r^ na 
 
 ^:j,i nil 
 
 ^ t 
 
 ^ta 
 
 ^.r td 
 
 ^ti 
 
 ^ tl 
 
 J3 tit 
 
 ,i^ir tu 
 
 pn 
 
 IS na 
 
 jSiT nd 
 
 jS ni 
 
 ji ni 
 
 ^ nil 
 
 jTfir nH 
 
 up 
 
 u pa 
 
 utT pd 
 
 lSI pi 
 
 iS pi 
 
 L^pU 
 
 y>i^^ 
 
 ih m 
 
 La nia 
 
 La:T md 
 
 uS^ mi 
 
 /J? ml 
 
 (Lp mil 
 
 eyj md 
 
 Lu y 
 
 uj ya 
 
 LUfT yd 
 
 n9 iji 
 
 uS yl 
 
 'H //'* 
 
 ^ y^ 
 
 IT r 
 
 IT ra 
 
 jriT rd 
 
 ^] ri 
 
 /f ri 
 
 (5 ra 
 
 ^ rd 
 
 ev I 
 
 6v la 
 
 evir Id 
 
 6SI li 
 
 €^ li 
 
 ^jlu 
 
 ^iT Id 
 
 €U V 
 
 eu va 
 
 eniT vd 
 
 sSl vi 
 
 cS vi 
 
 (2)^ VU 
 
 )it ^^ 
 
 ipr 
 
 Lt) ra 
 
 Lp;T rd 
 
 L^i ri 
 
 h^ n 
 
 (LP ra 
 
 (Lp r« 
 
 (St / 
 
 m la 
 
 mn- Id 
 
 eifi li 
 
 €1? It 
 
 (^ la 
 
 p^^ Id 
 
 pr 
 
 fo ra 
 
 Qtj rd 
 
 fiS ri 
 
 ^ n 
 
 ^ ru 
 
 £)!r rd 
 
 eisr n 
 
 etsr na 
 
 ^ nd 
 
 6Dfl ni 
 
 «5f ni 
 
 ^i na 
 
 ^)ij nu 
 
12 
 
 SYLLABICS. 
 
 (Continued.) 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Conso- 
 
 e 
 
 e 
 
 ai 
 
 
 
 6 
 
 au 
 
 nants. 
 
 G)<s5 he 
 
 Q& Tee 
 
 «j)<£5 Jcai 
 
 ©(fiF/r ho 
 
 QcsiT ho 
 
 Q-3B<sn hail 
 
 •ih 
 
 QiEi he 
 
 QiEi he 
 
 60) E/ I'lai 
 
 QrwiT ho 
 
 QfSJfT ho 
 
 QfEiofT hau 
 
 ik n 
 
 Q.F ^e 
 
 Q<3= qe 
 
 (dSiff^ Qai 
 
 Qs'fr QO 
 
 Q<3'rr QO 
 
 Q^FsfT Qau 
 
 <F q 
 
 ©(Cj ne 
 
 Q(^ ne 
 
 eo)^ nai 
 
 Q(^!T no 
 
 l(^iT no 
 
 Qf^miiau 
 
 (^ n 
 
 Qi^de 
 
 Ql- de 
 
 eoiL- dai 
 
 Qt^rr do 
 
 Ql.it do 
 
 Ql-stt dau 
 
 ^4 
 
 'Qem ne 
 
 Qem ne 
 
 dsm nai 
 
 ©(COT) no 
 
 Q(^) no 
 
 Q(om(Sfrnau 
 
 sabr H 
 
 Qp te 
 
 Q^te 
 
 ^€CD^ tai 
 
 Q^rr to 
 
 Q^iT to 
 
 Q^m tau 
 
 ^ t 
 
 QjB ne 
 
 Qjs ne 
 
 €0)/5 nai 
 
 Q151T no 
 
 Q(5iT no 
 
 QjE<5fr nau 
 
 ^n 
 
 Qu pe 
 
 Qu jpe 
 
 eou pai 
 
 Quit po 
 
 QufT p6 
 
 Qu&r pan 
 
 up 
 
 Qlc me 
 
 CoUi me 
 
 <sG)Ui mai 
 
 QidfT mo 
 
 QinfT mo 
 
 Qui<c(r man 
 
 LD m 
 
 Qiu ye 
 
 QiLi ye 
 
 <sa)uj yai 
 
 QujiT yo 
 
 QiufT yd 
 
 Qujetr yau 
 
 iLy 
 
 Ojr re 
 
 Qir re 
 
 eoijr rai 
 
 Qinr TO 
 
 QjTir ro 
 
 Qirm rau 
 
 /r r 
 
 Qev le 
 
 Qeo U 
 
 35U lai 
 
 Qeoir lo 
 
 QevfT Id 
 
 Qevm lau 
 
 ebl 
 
 Qeu ve 
 
 Qeu ve 
 
 «j)fflj vai 
 
 Qeurr vo 
 
 QeuiT vo 
 
 ©Qjerr van 
 
 euv 
 
 ©LQ re 
 
 Qifi re 
 
 eoLp rai 
 
 ©tp/r ro 
 
 QipiT ro 
 
 Qipm rau 
 
 tpr 
 
 QiM le 
 
 Q&r le 
 
 Ssrr lai 
 
 Q<Bfrfr lo 
 
 Qmn- Id 
 
 Q<sfr<sfr lau 
 
 ml 
 
 QjD re 
 
 QfD re 
 
 0s>p rai 
 
 Qqj; ro 
 
 Qqtj' ro 
 
 QfD&r rau 
 
 pr 
 
 Qssr ne 
 
 Q66r ne 
 
 ^oGT nai 
 
 Q^ no 
 
 (o(G0) no 
 
 Qesretr nau 
 
 esr n 
 
CONVENTIONAL CHARACTERS. 
 
 7. To the foregoing must be added the following Grantha 
 'etters and conventional abbreviations, commonly found in 
 official documents and in manuscripts : — 
 
 <^ hsha 
 & job 
 g ma 
 ei^ sha 
 
 ^ or «^|2/ = 
 
 ^im := 
 
 ah. =: 
 
 8 = 
 
 6L. — 
 
 tSP — 
 
 & = 
 
 ^ = 
 
 y^ = 
 
 L^ = 
 
 tS^ = 
 
 
 eiu 
 
 sa 
 
 
 fiJD 
 
 ha 
 
 
 <& 
 
 kJca 
 
 (^ 
 
 or @ 
 
 hhu 
 
 ^ tta 
 
 ^ (ta 
 
 ^ sri 
 
 jij^) and, an anna. 
 ^(SfTLD alam, a salt-pan. 
 
 ^tf dga, 
 
 total. 
 
 ^!in<gF !TiT<ff=erv^rfi irdja rdjastiri, most honour^ 
 able (a title). ^ 
 
 &60Lh halam, a measure of grain. 
 
 .ffiQLo hajam, a yard. 
 
 siTSi- hdruy cash. 
 
 <£S/r6e3fi Ajtin?, the fraction -^, 
 
 (^ifi Tcuriy a square (yard). 
 
 ^iT<^^<sn qiranjlva, "live l^ng," a polite title- 
 used in addressing a junior in rank. 
 
 ^6U(Si7/r65rii> gilvdnam, and odd. 
 
 (o^^ iedi, day of the month. 
 
 jBihufr namhar, number. 
 
 ^sorQ<ff=iu nangey, wet cultivation. 
 
 jSfTUj&ick ndyagan, headman. 
 
 ^[T&r^ ndladu, current. 
 
 jSevLd nilam, ground. 
 
 j§lff^<sj)(S}j niluvdi, remainder or balance f 
 arrears. 
 
 Q(5eo^ nelluy paddy. 
 
 u&sonh pananif money. 
 
 Lips' pattu, received. 
 
 UfTffLa jparaWf weight of 500 lbs. 
 
 uir ^L^iu^UfTGi^^^ jpd ahiyatpdahand, a form 
 of greeting. 
 
 LS/efrSsTT pilldiy caste title. 
 
^4 PHONETIC PRONUNCIATION. 
 
 L^mfi = L^mQs'iu pungey, dry cultivation. 
 
 d^u = (sou'd'n- jpaiqd, a pie. 
 
 Qtl. = QuiTssr pon, a gold coin equal to ten fanams. 
 
 uS^ = LD ITS' LB md(-am, a month. 
 
 ^^ = (Lps^&o rtiudal, first. 
 
 Q19. = dLo;cL'L9- metpadi, aforesaid, as above. 
 
 up = u^/ti yum, and. 
 
 '^'" ^^ ^ = ^uiTiu ruhay, rupee. 
 
 ^^ = <sv<5S)SiUffiT vagdiyardyh^ongiTLgi^f et Cdetera. 
 
 ^j = (fflj#Lb vagam, charge, control. 
 
 g4j_ = (a/ir(Si^ varavu, receipts. 
 
 rsf^ = <siJinT<35€or vardcjan, a pa.goda coin. 
 
 @D or ^ = fflj^si^LD variisliam, year. 
 
 @Vor^ = (aj(sroir<ffi@/i vardihhum, until. 
 
 €>![/ = (smla vum, and. 
 
 ^ = Q<s)j6Si veil, a land measure about 6 acres. 
 
 See also the section on Numerals, para. 19. 
 
 Phonetic Pronunciation of Tamil. 
 
 8. The words and phrases below illustrate the sounds of the 
 Tamil language, the pronunciation being added in accordance 
 with Marlborough's system of phonetics. 
 
 The student is recorrmiended to master the pronunciation 
 at the outset, with the help of this list of examples. The 
 precise use and value of each phonetic sign is shown on pages 
 8-10, which should be studied carefully. The following 
 additional explanations will also be of service : — 
 
 The principles on which this system of phonetics is based 
 .are: (1) the employment of English characters with their 
 ordinary pronunciation (or one of their sounds, where more 
 than one), witli as sparing a use as possible of diacritic signs; 
 and (2) ONE SIGN, one sound. ^Vliere, therefore, a "sign" 
 (i.e. letter or letters) might be variously sounded — and this 
 applies to each of the English vowels and some of the con- 
 sonants—its particular u^e in the scheme of phonetics should 
 be carefully noted, and each sign must always be sounded in 
 
PHONETIC PRONUNCIATION. 
 
 l» 
 
 the same manner wherever it occurs (one sign, one sound). 
 Any letter or letters printed in italics or with any mark 
 added has a special use which must be learnt. Thus : — 
 
 u represents {always and only) the sound of i^ in hun, sum. 
 the sound of e in other, filbert, &c. 
 „ i* in pull, or 00 in foot. 
 „ u in itcde, or oo in boor. 
 „ I or y in pity. 
 
 „ i in mi7ie or I (i.e. a diphthong). 
 „ tf in mcji, merry. 
 „ a in able, pane (i.e. a simple sound, 
 
 not diphthongized). 
 „ ay (dipljthong) in day, play. 
 „ ch in the Scotch word loch, 
 gh is written for g l)efore e or i to preserve the hard sound 
 
 of g as in regard. 
 ow represents the sound of ow in cow, tww. 
 
 rr I, one strong sound, the two r's not to be sounded 
 
 separately. 
 th », the sonnd of th in ivith, both. 
 
 th (ital.),, „ „ th in they, breathe. 
 
 For the cerebrals 7i and I, also for ng, ny, and ry, 
 see Alplia))et. 
 It should be noted that the first or root syllable of a Tamil 
 word has, as a general rule, a fuller intonation than the re- 
 maining syllables of the word. 
 
 
 tne 
 
 00 
 
 It 
 
 1 
 
 i (ital.) „ 
 
 
 e 
 
 »» 
 
 ay 
 
 »» 
 
 ay (ital.),, 
 ch{\iA\.)„ 
 
 •t 
 
 Tamil. 
 
 Transcript. 
 
 Pronunciation, 
 
 ^.sseoLD (Breadth) 
 (5(T5«6u (Darkness) 
 ^&<£BLh (Weiltb) 
 @/5j(?.5 (Here) 
 2_LL«/r(T5fiC?/r)«Jr (I sit 
 down) 
 <F/E;g^LQ (Song) 
 
 agalam 
 
 Icarugal 
 
 dkkam 
 
 tnge 
 
 utkdrugiren 
 
 gaiigidam 
 
 ugtiinm 
 
 kurugiil 
 
 ahk-kum 
 
 ing-gay 
 
 iitkahru-ghirrayn 
 
 shung- ghee^^iim 
 
to 
 
 PHONETIC PRONUNCIATION. 
 
 Tamil. 
 
 Transcript. 
 
 Pronunciation. 
 
 u9 (Hunger) 
 
 ;pa(^i 
 
 
 pushi 
 
 u<F<9=!fl9 (Eaw rice) 
 
 paccarigi 
 
 
 puch-churishi 
 
 £=itiL9 (Evidence) 
 
 gdfci 
 
 
 shaht-chi 
 
 Qptut'oB (Effort) 
 
 muyatd 
 
 
 muyiitchi 
 
 «@^ (Rice gruel) 
 
 Jcanji 
 
 
 kuii^-ji 
 
 (^:tu3^ (The sun) 
 
 ndyiru 
 
 
 nyah-yirru 
 
 ^is^ (A stick) 
 
 tadi 
 
 
 thudi 
 
 fiL.L-trsk (A gold- 
 
 tatfan 
 
 
 thuttahn 
 
 smith) 
 
 
 
 
 ^smi—Ln (A staff) 
 
 tandam 
 
 
 thundiim 
 
 ^<oGS<SijrrssrL^i—€6)eu 
 
 tanivdnapudavdi 
 
 thuwivahnupiidiivay 
 
 (Inferior cloth) 
 
 
 
 
 fi^es)^ (Father) 
 
 tanddi 
 
 
 ihunthay 
 
 ^iB^^^ (It twisted) 
 
 tirittadu 
 
 
 thirith-thuiAu 
 
 ^LD^ (Our) 
 
 namadu 
 
 
 mxmuthn 
 
 Udf-uQum (I shall 
 
 learn) 
 SlQ^u^ (Twenty) 
 
 padippen 
 
 
 pudippayn 
 
 iruhadu 
 
 
 irubii^^u 
 
 u/rtiiq (A snake) 
 
 pdmhu 
 
 
 pahmbfi 
 
 ji\i3ui3ff[T[nih (Inten- 
 
 ahippirdyam 
 
 ubippirah-yiim 
 
 tion) 
 
 
 
 
 u^0s>Goiu(f^s^ (A moun- 
 
 maldi-y-aruvi 
 
 mul-ay-yuruvi 
 
 tain torrent) 
 
 
 
 
 *«(Lpsj)^ (An ass) 
 
 haruddi 
 
 (kalu- 
 
 kuryuthay 
 
 
 ddi, in the 
 
 South) 
 
 {k\Au.thay in the S.) 
 
 •^ip^ero^ (An infant) 
 
 huranddi 
 
 (Tcu- 
 
 kiiryun^Aay 
 
 
 landdiy in 
 
 the S.) 
 
 (kiilmithay in the S.) 
 
 *ffl//r6B>ipULJtpLb 
 
 vdrdi-p-param 
 
 valirya2/ppuryum 
 
 (Banana fruit) 
 
 (vdldi-p-palam, 
 
 (vahk^/ppulum, S.) 
 
 
 in 
 
 the S.) 
 
 
 * In Ceylon and in Tinnevelly, &c., Lp is pronounced like &r, so much 
 so that there is very little difference in the pronunciation of the words 
 &6SI (kali) "noise," «t^ {hart) **stick," and «6yfl (kali) "joy." 
 
EULBS OP EUPHONY. 
 
 IT 
 
 Tamil. 
 
 Transcript. 
 
 Pronunciation. 
 
 ajbQ'^rDssr (I study) 
 
 katkiren 
 
 kut-kirrayn 
 
 spQjr)ssr (I studied) 
 
 Jcatten 
 
 kuttayn 
 
 ^ JQ} ,^ ^Q (iTf scr j^ 
 (Six hundred & one) 
 
 arunuUonru 
 
 uriinoot-tondru 
 
 ereerQroevr (I said) 
 
 enren 
 
 endrayn 
 
 jilo\^ (That) 
 
 ahdu 
 
 uchthu. 
 
 ♦q^ia^bsar (A man) 
 
 purusan 
 
 purushiin 
 
 j5(^i—Lh (Loss) 
 
 nasi am 
 
 nushtum 
 
 ^Qj<osrLa (Livelihood) 
 
 jivanam 
 
 jeeviinum 
 
 &u^i? (A woman) 
 
 stirl {for SU.8trl) 
 
 sthiree 
 
 (j^u^ (Husband of 
 S'ri, i.e. Vishnu) 
 
 sri'pati 
 
 shree-puthi 
 
 «r>^soar(J3 (A moment) 
 
 Jcsanam 
 
 kshu/mm 
 
 QiMiT^sh^ih (Heaven) 
 
 moksam 
 
 mohkshum 
 
 LD^fTinT&esr (Great 
 king) 
 
 mahdrajan 
 
 muhali-ralijiin 
 
 Rules of Euphony. 
 
 Note. — These Rules of Euphony are inserted here for reference. 
 The student should read them carefully, but need not at the outset 
 attempt to master them. Frequent reference, and practice in applying 
 the rules, will gradually make them familiar to him. 
 
 9. In Tamil, as in Sanskrit, practically all combinations of 
 suffixes with roots or stems, of the separate members of 
 compound words and even of those of a sentence, are more or 
 less governed by certain euphonic laws. A knowledge of 
 these laws will, therefore, be found most useful — nay, in- 
 dispensable to the student in analysing, and mastering the 
 construction of, Tamil sentences. 
 
 According to the leading principle of these rules of euphony, 
 the sounds of the Tamil alphabet may be classed as follows: — 
 
 • For the Grantha letters found in this and the succeeding words,. 
 ■ee p. 13. 
 
 Tamil amnmar S.-T. 
 
RULES OP EUPHONY. 
 
 
 Hard. 
 
 (surd) 
 
 Soft. 
 
 (sonant) 
 
 Nasal. 
 
 Liquids 
 and 
 Semi- 
 vowels. 
 
 Voyrels. 
 
 Diph- 
 Short. Long. thongs. 
 
 •Gutturals 
 
 <sk,ooOT^f^h* 
 
 <ffigf (medial) 
 
 /Q n 
 
 
 
 Palatals 
 
 <Fg, nor 
 
 ^j n 
 
 ^n,ssr n 
 
 Lu y 
 
 Cerebrals 
 
 , • f (when 
 
 '- ? doubled) 
 
 ^4 
 
 6asr n 
 
 i^r,<sfrl 
 
 
 Dentals 
 
 ^t 
 
 ^d „ 
 
 ^n 
 
 ^ r, ebl 
 
 
 Labials 
 
 up 
 
 uh „ 
 
 ih m 
 
 QJV 
 
 
 10. Of these letters, any vowel may begin or end a word ; 
 but out of the eighteen consonants, only nine may be used as 
 initials, namely Jc, q, n, t^ n, p, m, y, v, and eleven as finals, 
 namely ii, n, 71, n, m, y, r, I, v, r, and /. In the word nanam 
 (jsi'osrLj:), which, however, is never used without one of the 
 demonstrative prefixes a (that), i (this), and u (that yonder), 
 or the interrogative e (which) and yd (what), as aniianam 
 ^isjiEi&sriM "in that place," ^ibiEi&snh innanam, **in this place,'* 
 Ac, the letter n may be regarded as an initial. Further, the 
 letters ?i, n, and v are very rarely, if ever, used as finals. 
 
 11. (a) As r and Z ure not permitted initials, every word 
 etymologically beginning with either of them takes, as a rule, 
 one of the vowels a, i, or w as a euphonic prefix ; e.g. arangam 
 jijiTibsLDy for Sanskrit ranga; irattam ^f^^im, for Prakrit 
 rattam; irdgam ^}irfr&Lh, for Skt. rdga; uruva/m S-Q^guld, 
 for rupam ; Ilaiigdi @6u/b«5)<£e, for Lanka ; ulagam &.6v<sld, for 
 loka] &c. 
 
 (6) The initial y also often takes the prefix i for the sake 
 of euphony, or it becomes e vulgarly ; thus, Sanskrit yama=z 
 iyaman @a_'LD«<jr or eman (onusk. 
 
 12. When two or more words or parts of a single word 
 <5ombine, certain changes, in the nature of assimilations, take 
 place at the points of combination under the following cir- 
 cumstances : — 
 
 • This is the so-called aydam, which is only a guttural aspirate, and 
 is never combined with a vowel. According to Tamil grammarians, it 
 is in some places pronounced like a vowel, in others like a consonant, 
 but is neither the one nor the other. It always stands quite by itself, 
 hence it is called TantJuTat, "solitary letter." 
 
RULES OF EUPHONY. 19 
 
 Vowels with Vowels. 
 
 i. Between the final vowel* of one member of a comj ound 
 and the initial vowel of the following member, y or v is in- 
 serted to avoid hiatus. Final i, i, and ai take y before an 
 initial vowel ; final e takes eiiher y or v, and the others v. 
 Thus:— 
 
 nari+ dl-^nariydl jBtflLuireo **by a fox." 
 ni+um=niyum j^il^ld "thou also." 
 ]panai-\-dldi=zpandiydldi udosrQiLiiT^ "palmyra leaf." 
 (^+adi=z(^<ivadi (o^<sni^ "red foot"; Q€ + aga'm=r.eyagain 
 
 Q'ff=uj<SLh " red grain." 
 para + araru^^paravara/^u unsnus- "foreign king." 
 kudd-\-orukkam=:ikuddvorukJcam A-L_/rO<2i/;r(i^^«t£) "im- 
 proper conduct." 
 pa^u-\- ddu=paQUvddu usi-QeuiT® "with a cow." 
 mu + ainduzzimuvdindu ^soa;;?^^ "three times five." 
 kd-\-il=kovil Q&fTsEleb (also koyil (o£BfTu9&j) "king's 
 abode," temple or church. 
 
 Exceptions : — 
 
 (a) The final short i* of a dissyllabic word of which the 
 first syllable is long, as mddu oi/r®, or of words of 
 more than two syllables, as padittu uu^^^, is elided 
 before a following vowel ; e.g. mddu + e=mdde im^Qi-. 
 " O bullock ! "; padittu -|- irukkiren = padiWirukkiren 
 ui^^^^sQQpecr " I have learnt" (lit. having learnt, 
 I am). If the short u happen to be attached to d or 
 r, the consonant is commonly doubled ; as, mudu + odu 
 ^:^mdf(6duf Ln!TiLQi—u® "with the bullock"; dru-\-il=z 
 dttilX ^tb/iSeo " in the river." 
 
 (6) After the demonstrative prefixes a, i, and u and the 
 interrogative e, v is inserted and doubled before a fol- 
 lowing vowel; a,8 J a -\-aragu=^avvaraQU ^su^Jirsr "that 
 king "; i-\-irdi-=iivvirdl §)SiJoSl6a)ro "this lord "; u-^ddu 
 uwddu &.(SL6uir® "that (yonder) sheep"; e + alavuz=: 
 ewafavu tsjeueumei^ " what extent, how much ? " 
 
 • Whether resulting from an ellipsis or not. 
 t d when doubled is transcribed and pronounced tf. 
 X T when doubled is transcribed and pronounced tt- See p. 10 and 
 p. 17, col. 8. 
 
 C ' 
 
20 RULES OF EUPHONY. 
 
 (c) The relative participle ending in a does not, as a 
 rule, combine with the initial vowel of the following 
 word; a.B, tagwida uttaravu s^^jji^ ^^^u-(sq "proper 
 leave." 
 
 Vowels with Consonants. 
 
 ii. After the demonstrative prefixes a, i, and u, and the 
 interrogative e, all initial consonants are doubled ; as, a(p)padi 
 ^uui^ "in that manner"; i(p)padi ©ljlj^l "in this manner"; 
 e(p)pcidi OTu/Ji^L "in what manner?"; u{rti)mddii s-LDiMfr®. 
 " that bullock yonder." 
 
 Exceptions. — When the initial is y, v is inserted ; as, e(v)yutti 
 <o\eu\L\s^^ "which expedient?" Compare also para. 12, i., 
 exception h. 
 
 iii. After vowel-finals the hard initials h, q, t, and p are 
 doubled; as, un pvMagattaiic) Ginna(p) paiyanukhu{lc) Jcodu 
 
 ^6sr Ljmj^<sB^ (SOSES' ^esrsoTLj (SJ)uuj^^<so^<s Q<sB[r® " Give your 
 book to the small bov." 
 
 Exceptions. — The hard initials are not doubled after the 
 final vowel of the following : — 
 
 (a) Relative participle ; as, pona kdlam Courrsor sn-eoLD 
 "past time"; nan Icodutta panam jpfr(ssr Q^tr®^^ 
 uescTLD "the money I gave." See also 12, i. c. 
 (6) Finite verb; as, oduginrana kudirdigal ^®Qmm&sr 
 (^^:<s^rr<sBm " the horses run." 
 
 (c) The third or ablative of connection, the sixth or 
 genitive, and the vocative cases ; as, avanodu po j^(su 
 (D(^(b) Quit " go with him"; enadu kaigal (Si&sr^ €o&S(srr 
 "my hands"; avanuddiya tambi ^6n^}]iyS)i^tij ^lb\3 "his 
 younger brother"; jiaiyane qollu <oouiuQ<sffr Qs^ireb^j 
 " O boy, say ! " 
 
 (d) A pronoun; as, adu huridu jtj^ (§/^^ "that is 
 short." 
 
 (e) A numeral; as, oru qaiigadi 90 <f/e/<£e^ "an affair." 
 (/) A verbal ellipsis, i.e. a verbal root used as an adjec- 
 tive; as, varu pnnal <suq^ i^sereo "the flowing waters 
 (of a river)." 
 
 {g) An interrogative, or the particles of emphasis, e and 
 0; as, ivand gonndn ^<su{^ Q) <a= it <m ^,<osr "did this man 
 say ? "; aiige po ^iki(o<s Quit " go there." 
 
BOLES OF EUPHONY. 
 
 Consonants with Vowels. 
 
 iv. A final consonant combines with an initial vowel without 
 any change, except in the manner of writing; as, ariycn + 
 enrdn ^fStQiu&sr (oTsk^rr^sar := ariyenenrdn j^fSQiuQoSTohQr^&a- 
 " he said, * I do not know/ " 
 
 Exception: — The final consonant of a short monosyllable 
 is doubled before an initial vowel; as, Jcal-{-ardi=ka1lardi 
 Aeveoso/D "a rock-cave," **a sepulchre"; kal + dgdri=: 
 kalld<;dri aeoeoii^'trtf-} "a stonemason." 
 
 Consonants with Consonants. 
 
 V. A final consonant other than y often takes the increment 
 t before an initial y, the consonant being doubled in the case 
 of a short monosyllable ; as, man+yddti=^manniyddu tasxresSi 
 [uiT^ *' what soil ? " 
 
 vi. After a final y or ai of a monosyllable, the initial A:, ^, 
 », t, n, p, or (rarely) m is doubled; as, poy + Jcdl=poykkdl 
 QunCuk&iieo "false leg"; ndy + hutti=ndykkut{i is(TujS{^L-iif. 
 "a puppy"; vdy+pirappu=^vdyppirappu (Sij mi ulS/duli "a 
 declaration; kai+pidi=kaippidi &si<a5ULSii^ " a handful"; A;ai+ 
 mu{ti=kaimmu{{i €s><siJD(LfiLLu^ "the clenched fist." 
 
 vii. Final r or r often doubles the initial k, g, t, or p; as, 
 nlr-\-guru=nirccdru ^h<FQ<Fn^ "boiled rice kept over night 
 in water"; kur+pdndiz=kurppdndi <ak.L^uun-^sar "a pap-pot." 
 
 viii. The remaining consonants often undergo the following 
 changes in euphonic combinations : — 
 
 n+k=tk: a8,-f ^^? +Jcudam^matkudamU ^^^^^^^ ^^., 
 
 Compare, however, kavan + kdran=kavankdran seusir 
 <s[Tir&sr " a slinger." 
 
 n+c=!c: asJ""*? +f"''".'-='««;<^«''r l-mud wall." 
 
 j an +tagdi=zdndagdi l"a person be- 
 n-\-t^nd', as,-^^^_^_^^^^__^^^^^ /fitting, a king." 
 
 Cf. also kanden «swr(^i_6ar "I saw," from kan + t + en. 
 
RULES OF EUPHONY. 
 
 n + n=:^nn or simply «; as, 
 
 f man +nilain:=mannilam ) ,, _.u tj 
 < : ; n . : -n . >** earth"; 
 
 f <r.« + «a«r" = tumnru \ ,, ^^^ .^^^ j^ ^^^,r 
 
 ^ , , X {man +pdttiram. =manpdttiram \ 
 
 n H-«=:^« (rarely); as, -? • ' ^ . ^ . •/ •«,.,•«.< 
 
 or •< . .^ • V earthen vessel. 
 
 , __ , fj90w +]cudam=potkudam ) "gold 
 
 n+k^tfc; as,-^g^^^_^_^^^^^ =QLj.r,i:.;^L_m f pitcher/' 
 
 _ Ji^ow +garadu=potcaradu ) "gold 
 
 -■^^-- ' ^^'"\0L,'/r^ + <Fir® =0un-;f)<Fir® J wire." 
 
 n+^=« or nr ; as, 
 
 fjtjow +tattdn =pottattdn )"agold- 
 
 \QuiT£sr -\- s^LLi—[T6srz=iQun fi)nr)LLi—rrssr j smith"; 
 
 j pon +iimdi =zponrlmdi 1 "the evil of 
 \QuiT6er + ^oS)Lnz=Qurr<ssr/S€a)LD f gold.'' 
 
 n-^n=:nn or »; as, 
 
 j ^o« +«a?r« =ponmnru ) ., j^ j^ ^^^.. 
 
 I —^ . , ii^^? +panidi =potpanidi )"gold 
 - "~-P ^ *\Qun-esr-{'U(3SisFi^=zQutT(bu(o5sfl^ f jewels." 
 
 . 1 . ^ f maram+Jcal =zmaranqal ] ,, ^ ,, 
 m+ii = ng', as,-< . •. . ^.- y" trees. 
 
 ^ ( LDITLD •\'<S<Sn=L£ijriSl<35(orr j 
 
 m + Q=^n^; as, 
 J vinnappam + gey den =vinnappanQeyden \ 
 
 '* I presented a petition." 
 m+t=nt; as, 
 j visam -{-th-umpiHu z=visantirumpiUu "|" the poison 
 \ s^:(Siit.t:o-\-B((3LDiS'jb^=zsSei^^^Q^i:aLSln)^ j ^^ counter- 
 
 acted. 
 
RULES OF EUPHONY. 28^ 
 
 i cern +ndy =Qenndy ) "a reddish 
 
 m is sometimes dropped before an initial consonant, and 
 the latter, if bard, is doubled ; as, 
 
 j maram-\-nay zi^mara-nay \,, pole-cat." 
 
 J2iakkam + Qol =paUaccol* ^ 1 "a friendly 
 
 l^k-tk' as I ^'^. +^'-r'^ • =^^'f7^5 . i"I learn." 
 
 l^r-tc- e.si^^^ +^''-^''^' =^^^!'^^'!^ V'trousers- 
 *-t-9— ic, "-^'^ ^.^6^_|.^j_505L_=:«/rn9.FL.«0L_ I 
 
 l-^t=nr,tt or r, or hr (o'o/p); as, 
 
 jnil+t+en =nrnr^ . I" I stood"; 
 
 J kadal+turdi =:kadatturdi 1 ..3, geaport"; 
 
 Jt^-Z +mu=verulu I . ^art is evil "; 
 
 i «^ . +^iT """-rii V'no class." 
 
 l-^n=^Jin or n ; as, 
 
 ] nal +neri =n,a?nent K, ^^^ conduct"; 
 
 J pal + nanru =:pdnanru \ ,, ^^^ -^ ^^^^ „ . 
 \u[r&J +(5 SOT £ii=^u[r66r (osr^ j 
 f iZ ^ninru —ininru 1" standing from," sign 
 \ @6u + ;§^jii = g)6ofls^^ j of 5th or ablative case. 
 i kdl +padi=hdtpadi Y'2i(\\X2iXter 
 i+i)=«p; ^S'l ^^rev + uif = &iTp)Uisf- j measure." 
 
 / weZ +makkal=menmakkal V'g^®^* 
 Z+m=»m; as,-< Q,^gj^_^^^^^_.(5^g^ijj^^gT7- j" men."" 
 
 * .f p when doubled, or after iL or ^, is transliterated c, and pro. 
 nounced like ch in church. 
 
 t Similarly, naZ-.^2li=nanptll (^6^,^6u) " good system," name of 
 Tamil Grammar by Pavananti. 
 
RULES OP EUPHONY. 
 
 ) I— J. i ^l +^ai/ccal -^uthdyccal ) "internal 
 
 • "^ • ' ^^'\^m-\-<ssinh<F<!Feoz=^iL&ndjS'<feo] fever." 
 
 /+c=<c: as.! "-'.tf"'/"^ ="•«?»»'■ l" under vest." 
 j-{-t=.tt or d, or nd ; as, 
 
 j kel ^ +t +en =zketten ^ l"I asked "• 
 
 j ndl -Riorum =zndddrum ),, -, „^ 
 
 /«/ +«+e-» =a«rfe« I. a ruled." 
 
 7+n=ww or n ; as, 
 
 f A;o/ -i-nanru =konnanru 1 ** gram is 
 
 ( G)«-Tsfr+ fl?ssrji; = QrfF/rsK5rs253rgOT-^ j good"; 
 
 { arul +nddan =arunddan 1 ,, i j i. >) 
 
 i • . -. • - . v " lord of grace. 
 
 J+p= ip ; as, -I "•' . +i'«3»'=«fWSi ) " 
 
 internal 
 enmity.* 
 7j_*«_««v, . oo J '"^'^l +mudi—munmudi ) "crown of 
 
 ( (tp0fr+(LD^L =(LpsaJ5r(LpL9. j 
 
 thorns.' 
 
 ix. To these must be added a few anomalous formations, 
 •such as pananJcddu u6gtie]^it® " a palmyra forest," from _pawai 
 -^hddu ; iVZdw ^eljgu/rssr or ildn ^evfresr, from illddavafi @6u 
 -eoiT^eusky and the like, mostly found in poetry. Also a few 
 Sanskrit vowel-combiuations, chiefly in words borrowed from 
 that language : — 
 
 a + a or d=d; as, deva + at{devan=devdHdevan Q^<sxiiT^ 
 Q^eneisT " God of gods "; deva-j-dQt7'vddam=zdevdgJrvd' 
 diim Q <$ <su rr^ IT (sn IT ^LD " Grod's blessing." 
 
 a + i or i=ze; as, nara+indiran=znarendiran jeQf^^it^ 
 " man's lord, king." 
 
 a + w or w=o ; as, para +upakdram= par opahdram uQirir 
 
 u<sB[Tinh "kindness to others." 
 n-\-u or u-=zu-^ as, guru + upade(;am=gurupade(^m (^^ 
 
 uQ<s<FLo "teacher's instruction." 
 
THE PARTS OF SPEECH. 
 
 Articles. 
 
 a 
 
 13. In Tamil there is no article to represent the English 
 ("an") or "the." Thus, La<s6sr (magan) may mean 
 *' a son " or ** the son," just as Latin ^Ziws or Sanskrit putrah. 
 But 9(5 (orii) and ^fr (Or), the adjectival forms of e^sar^ 
 (onru) "one," are sometimes used as substitutes for "a" 
 or ** an," the former before a consonant and the latter before 
 a vowel, as 9(5 Locssar (one magan) "a son" and ggr ^Ssor 
 (or dndi) *' an elephant." Besides the demonstrative ]>refixes 
 ^, g), and e. (see paras. 10 and 16 B), and a few postpositions 
 of emphasis, such as ^6or(SU(ssr (dnavan), ^esreu&r (dnaval)f 
 ^SBT^ (d/jadu), (oTesrueuek (enbavan), <fec., Tamil has no 
 equivalent for the English definite article " the." 
 
 Nouns. 
 Gender and Ntjmber. 
 
 14. i. All Tamil nouns are divided into two main classes, 
 namely, s.uj/r^/8s<33r iiyar-tindi, "upper class," a.nd j)j 00 fiSl^sssr 
 ahrindi (i.e. al + tindi, see § 12, viii.), "no class." 
 
 The former comprises all rational beings, as gods, men, 
 &c., and has, therefore, two genders, masculine and feminine ; 
 while the latter, which includes all irrational beings and 
 inanimate objects, as cats, dogs, trees, truth, goodness, &c., 
 has only the neuter gender. Hence, words such as QuL.eo)L- 
 peffdif "a hen," Qu6^(^^(sa>jr jpen-Jcudirdi, "a mare," though 
 really feminine, yet are treated as neuter nouns, the verbs 
 agreeing with them being always put in the neuter; as, 
 (oiuesaT(§^es)sr Q<ff^^(u)(Sufrs6r^ pen-kudirdi Qetiu(jp)pdnadu 
 (neut.), " the mare died" (not pondl, fern.). 
 
26 
 
 ^OUNS. 
 
 ii. The gender is also indicated by means of the termina- 
 tions : n {an 01 an) tor the masculine singular nominative; 
 / (al or dl), i, and di for the feminine ; and du or adu for the 
 neuter ; e.g. 
 
 F. N. 
 
 he ,^<su(sfr ehe ^^ it 
 
 aval 
 
 LD<s(sh daughter 
 magal 
 
 LDrTiSl aunt 
 mdmi 
 
 M. 
 avan 
 
 son 
 
 magan 
 
 LaiTLDm uncle 
 mdman 
 
 mattadu 
 
 adu 
 
 the other 
 thing 
 euQ^Sino^^ the act of 
 varugiradu coming 
 
 The gender of nouns that do not have these endings can 
 only l)e kno^vn by their meaning ; e.g. 
 
 M. 
 
 ^^<o6)^ a father 
 tanddi 
 
 a mother 
 
 tamhi 
 
 a younger 
 brother 
 
 F. 
 
 tdy 
 
 ^ih'oSi'S a younger 
 
 tangdi sister 
 
 Ls^jTLn a tree 
 maram 
 
 (d£=sv6v a cock' 
 Qeval 
 
 iii. There is but one Plural for both masculine and femi- 
 nine nouns. It is formed by adding r (ar) or Jcal (set) to 
 the crude form. 
 
 Those nouns which end in n or / in the nominative singular 
 take r (sometimes 7'Jcal ^r^gfr), before which n and / are 
 dropped. Thus: — 
 
 Suig. 
 ^sussT avan he 
 ^suet aval she 
 Q^eiisi^ tevan god 
 LDiSsir magan son 
 Lns^m magal daughter 
 
 I 
 
 Plur. 
 
 ^(Sufr^&eh) avar(gal) 
 Q^€uit(£B(S{t) tevar{ga}) 
 Ln^sfr magar 
 
 Other nouns (masc. and fem.) take either r (ar) or kal ; 
 I, ;3jsi^;fpiuir tanddi-y.ar, " fathers "; ^inurr tdy-ar/' mothers'"; 
 
 * Tills is, strictly speaking, a masculine noun, but as it belongs to 
 ^e%;6ldom- ahrindi class, it is treated as a neuter. In the same 
 manner, all nouns, masculine or feminine, of this class of irrational 
 beings are treated as neuters. 
 
NOUNS. 
 
 2r 
 
 QussBTU^ir pendir, or Qusscr(B>'S<sn pendugal (pi. oi pendu, "a 
 wife," VTilg, for Q u ssar dF fr ^i penQddi); LSlprr^''S(srr pilldi-gal, 
 ' children." 
 
 Some add tlie terininatiou dr (prob. a contraction of ava/r) 
 or mar (more or less as an honorific plural) ; as, ^<sBuu(G6)ir 
 tagappan-dr, ^<£ELJLJs<jrLD/rn-<a^apj;an-war, "fathers"; ^ihiSuoifrir 
 tamhi-mdr, " jounger brothers." 
 
 Tho neuter nouns ending in du either simply drop du in 
 the plural, or change it into na, or more often to vdi, to which 
 Teal is sometimes added. Other neuter nouns simply add hal 
 to the singular nominative. Thus : — 
 
 Sing. Plur. 
 
 BjjSliu^ that which is little 3 q'^„.JL" /^;. 
 (;iriyadu 
 
 < s-ijDiuj<56r Qiriyana 
 
 a snake 
 
 pdmhu 
 
 paQic 
 
 maram 
 See also Derivative and Verbal Nouns, paras. 18 and 32-38. 
 
 a cow 
 
 a tree 
 
 LJfrLoi_/«(sfr pdmbugal 
 
 £J<£FF<«<£5<si7" pUQU-k-Jcal 
 
 mirikism marangal 
 
 Declension. 
 15. In the following model, the case endings are separated 
 from the stem bv hyphens for the sake of clearness. These 
 
 ENDINOS ARE THE SAME FOR ALL NOUNS, SINGULAR AND 
 PLURAL. 
 
 (a) 1. Nominative. 
 2. Accusative. 
 
 8. Instrumental 
 or Ablative 
 of connection. 
 
 4. Dative. 
 
 GU [T ^ ^ iSS SOT 
 
 varttagan 
 varttagan-di 
 varitagan-dl 
 varttagan-odu 
 
 i<nil fir c^ <9 <S 6C)I <sS c^ 
 varttagan-ukhu 
 varttagan-ukkdga 
 
 a merchant 
 a merchant 
 by a merchant 
 
 (together) with 
 a merchaur 
 to a merchant 
 
 for a merchant 
 
J8 
 
 NOUNS. 
 
 5. Ablative of 
 place whence. 
 
 6. Genitive. 
 
 7. Locative. 
 
 8. Vocative. 
 
 varttagan-il 
 
 varttagan ■ ilirundu* 
 eu ir s^ ^ <9S icofl (SSn ssr ^ 
 varttagan-ininruf 
 
 varttagan- 1 1 del iya 
 
 varttagan-in 
 
 eu fr ^ ^ -^s 6sr ^ 
 varttagan-adu 
 
 (Sijfr ^^&S(^GO 
 varttagan-il 
 
 varttagan- idattilX 
 
 varttagan-e 
 
 from a 
 
 mercbiiiit 
 
 of a merchant 
 
 at, in, or with 
 a me re bant 
 
 O merchant ! 
 
 (5) The plural of varttagan is, as explained above, sviT^^<3sh 
 ^arttagar or 6urr^^<sErir<as(siT varttagargal. To this, case-termina- 
 tions are added as in the singular; e.g. Ace. <snh^^<s^jr 
 vartta^ardi or enHr^^'SEiT&'bsfr varttagargaldi, Insir. (snif^^'SS'fTeo 
 varttagardl, &c. Similarly, Ace. pi. of lofld maram=-u^iT!b<s'^ 
 marangaldif Instr. LnFi5i<sB<s(r[T6o marangaldl, &c. 
 
 (c) Observe that all these case-endings begin with vowels. 
 Hence, when they are affixe^i to nouns ending in vowels or 
 consonants, the euphonic changes explained in par. 12 (i. and 
 iv.) take place; e.g. maldi+di=zmaldiydi lb2sv(^lu (Acc.) ; 
 2)7di + dl=^puliydl L^eStun-eo (Instr.) ; 2)aQU-\-uhkio=paQuvukku 
 Lj«3F(a/«@ (Dat.) ; tdlu+uhhu-=:.taluhhu ^fr^j&(^ (Dat. ; see 
 § 12, i., exc. a); ddu + uJc1cu=:dttuJcJcu ,^iL®<bi^ (Dat.; see 
 § 12, i., exc. a); goru+ukhu^i^dUukku Qs'rrib^<S(^ (Dat.); 
 
 * Literally means ** being from." §)Q^^^ irundu is the gerund or 
 adverbial participle of iru, "remain." See below, para. 31, ii. 
 
 + Jnirt^ti is a euphonic combination of ^&o+jSssr^ il-\-ningu 
 " standing from." See above, para. 12, viii. Ninru is the gerund of 
 ^il. See below, para. 31, ii. 
 
 J Idattil itself is the locative of idam, " place." 
 
PRONOUNS. 29 
 
 kal-{-(n=kalldi ^eu&u (Ace.), but kdl+di=Jcdldi sirosv (see 
 § 12, iv.). 
 
 Exceptions : — 
 
 (1) Nouns ending in m change m into ttu in the singular 
 before adding the case- suffixes ; as, marattu (from 
 maram LairLa)-\-di, marattdi lq ir^ero^ (Ace.) ; manam 
 Ln..,LO, however, becomes usually manaddi Loissrso)^ 
 instead of manattdi. 
 
 (2) The increments attu and in are often inserted be- 
 tween the noun and the case-endings ; e.g. gila-\-attu-\- 
 di=zQilavattdi ^eoeu/bssifD ; Qila + attu-\-in + di=r^ilavat' 
 tindi &6v<supj£l'^ ; kal + in + di =: hallindi .seusiSSoor ; 
 marattu (from maram) -{• in + di=^ mar attindi ldjt^^'^. 
 
 Pronouns. 
 
 16. Pronouns are declined in the same way as nouns, and 
 with the same case-endings. In the oblique cases, however, 
 some of them change root, as may be seen from the following 
 models : — 
 
 A. Personal Pronouns. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 1 XT ( jprrek nan 7 t 
 
 1. Nom. I ^p^^^ ^-^ y.^^ j I 
 
 2. Ace. (oTssr^eBT en-n-di* me 
 
 q J , C €Teisr(^&j en-n-dl by me 
 
 ' ^^ ^' \ (oTsirQt^Q en-n-odu with me 
 
 AT)*. I <5TS5r<ffi@ en-ahhuf to me 
 
 ( €r&5r<k<siT<s en-akhdga for me 
 
 i <oT sir <osfl 6v en-n~il \ 
 
 6. Abl. \ (oTssreofleSQ^^^ en-n-ilirundu > from me 
 f STsareofleoflsar^ en-n-ininru ) 
 i (oT(ssr en, sreor^ en-adu J 
 
 6. Gen. < si^^^eai—iu en-n-uddiya > of me. 
 ( (or6k<oafissr en-n-in ) 
 
 . Loc. "< • o . ^~ 'J n'l Mn or witn me 
 
 ( OTcweafli-^^eu en-n-idattil ) 
 
 * For the doubling of final p, see above, § 12, iv., exo. 
 t This short form of the root takes afefcw, not uhlcu. 
 
30 FKUNOUXS. 
 
 Plural. 
 1. Norn. \ '""T 'T"" .. ^^'*?^^' """" ^""'^ r we 
 
 ( jsiTLD nam* (Poet, (u/rtii yam) ) 
 
 \ /smkis&T ndn-gal 5 
 
 „ . C ^LDoOLci nam-m-di ) 
 
 Ace. I g7,Q^2^rew-gfa/-/u (Poet. (STLb«Da)ew-m-<i?) ) 
 
 us 
 
 ;5'Lfl/j0ff"6U, ST fkl <EB 'ofT tr &0 , ((STLDfJQ/T sl)) bj US 
 
 o -r i J nam-m-dl, engal-dl, (em-m-dl) 
 
 ) jBLaQioif®, ST fk <9i(o <s(r IT ® , ((oT/i(?L£i/r©) with us 
 
 \.nam-m-odu, engal-ddu, (em-m-odu) 
 
 r n}LDi(§, sTikj&^.s.'^,, (sTL£>&c^), sTfk'^il.(^ to us 
 
 4. Dat. < nam-ahhu, engal-ukku, (em-ahJcn), engat-hu 
 
 { fBLCi''5-siT<s, nani-al'Jcdga, &c. for us 
 
 /BLhu9ev na m -m - / / 
 jSLoiSie^lThn:,^ na m-m-il- irundu 
 
 5. Abl. \ (oT IB .<E (srfl &u engal-il J^froni us 
 <oT /Q <£5 orfl (sS iF 4i' e ngal-il-irwidu 
 (^(oTLBL^eo em'm-il)y &c. 
 jBLo nam, sribsm engal, (ctld em) 
 
 jb'La^^ ST lb <s err i^ , (stld^;) 
 /. p J tiam-adu, engal-adu, (em-adu) (of us, 
 
 !BLCi(Lp<3s>L-iLi nam-m-uddiya [ <^^r 
 
 OT/5J<fi5(erpeo3L_(ij engal-uddiya 
 jSLDL^ssr nam-m-in, STikj<s5srfieer engal-in 
 
 7. Loc. 
 
 ) nam-m-idattil, nam-m-il f 
 
 ) (STii'ssrf^L-^^ieb engal-idattil i 
 
 V (oTE/dBgrfleij engal-il, {sTthuSev em-m-il) 1 
 
 in or 
 with us 
 
 1. 
 
 Norn. nl Si"g"lar. 
 
 thou 
 
 2. 
 
 k f S-ssrSajr un-n-iil 
 ^' {(Poet. j9 J '^ nln^n-di) 
 
 Ithee 
 
 3. 
 
 Instr. ) (i^^®^^ nin-n-dl) 
 j s_sstQ(^(Si ufj-fi-Odu 
 \ (0odiQ^Q niji-n-udu) 
 
 >by thee 
 I with thee 
 
 * "Nam " we '* including those that are spoken to ; nangal excludes 
 them. '" 
 
PRONOUNS. ai 
 
 f ^.-osrsr^ unahlcu "I . 
 
 4 Dat ) i^^^k^ninahhu) |- to thee 
 
 (&.6or«-s ,'/-<« imaJcJidga \ ,. ,-, 
 
 {iSm^sns ninakkdga) |-tortJiee 
 
 / &.sisT(^iev unnil 
 
 K AKi ) ^^^^Q^^hmi unnilirundu I j. ^. 
 
 *• ^^'- i».«r«>fl^T»rji, unnininru ( ^'■°'" *^^ 
 
 \^ (^^(5/(50^61) 7iinnil, &c.) y 
 
 &-eor^ unadu 
 
 6. Gen. -{ ^dr^^i^L-Lu unnuddlya ^ of thee 
 a. ^tV 6ofl «jr www /« 
 (^^(jr nin, &c.) 
 
 7. Loc. -j C;^«Jrsofl6ij ninnil) > in or with thee 
 
 ( Q-Qfirsifli—^^ev unnidattil ) 
 
 Plural. 
 
 1. Nom. I ^p_^^^ _^^;^ ^.^.^^ • j-you or ye 
 
 r e_Lr)«&LD um-m-di 
 
 2. Ace. < 2_/Q<i£'SsYr unyal-di J- you 
 
 (^ (Poet. ^t3iiD)L£» uum-m-di) 
 s_LnLoiT&o umindl 
 2_/o%<srry7 6l> uiigaldl |» by vou 
 
 5. Instr. ^ ^ /o, - , ^ 
 
 s.ik<s(o6rr,r® ungalOdu ^ with you 
 
 (^LoQiniT® nummodu) 
 
 4. Dat. 
 
 /' a.LD«'^ umakhu '\ 
 
 ) '^iw<as(^<S(^ unijaluhhu > to you 
 
 ^ {^Lo&(§ numakhu) ) 
 \^Q.L£>s<siT<fE umakkdgaj <fcc. for you 
 
 C ©.tioyeu ummil ^ 
 
 6. Abl. < ^ib&isi^Go ungalil > from you 
 
 {^^lc^lBcHq^^^ ummilirundUf &c. j 
 
 Nir is used as an honorific plural, as *' you " in English. 
 
PRONOUNS. 
 
 r S.LQ um, (^LJD num), SLiksm ungal' 
 
 6. Gen. lumadu, (numadii), nngaladu \oijon 
 I ^LD(Lp<5S)i—uj ummuddiya 
 V &.fki<35i^(oG)t—Uj ungaluddiya 
 ^ihu9d) ummil, (^ldlSIgo nummil)^ 
 
 ^LnuSL^ff.^ev ummidattil ( in or 
 
 ^miE€i^e^ ungalil f with you 
 
 &./E;«(STftL-^^6t> ungalidattil J 
 
 B. Demonsteativb Peonotjns 
 (or Personal Pronouns of the Third Person). 
 
 Loc. 
 
 1. Nom. — 
 
 M. 
 
 ^mm avan, he 
 
 2. Ace. — 
 avan-di 
 
 Instr. — 
 
 ^(aL/(C0)6i) 
 avandl 
 
 avanodu 
 4. Dat.— 
 
 avanuJchu 
 (Poet. ^eijib(§) 
 avathu 
 
 avanuTckdga 
 5.- Abl.— 
 
 avanil, &c. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 F. 
 
 jfl&j&r aval, she 
 
 ^eu'^r aval-di 
 
 avalal 
 
 avalodu 
 
 avalukku 
 
 avalukkdga 
 avalil, &c. 
 
 N. 
 ^^ adu, it 
 (Poet. j)joo^ ahdv} 
 
 ^<5S)^ ad-di 
 ^^doGT ad-an-di* 
 
 ' ^^neo addl 
 ^^cSireu attdl 
 ji\^i^eo adindlf 
 ^^^eo adandl* 
 '"^--^adodu 
 
 adanodui 
 
 ( ^;Sfi)(^ adatku* 
 \ j>i^ijb(^ aditkuf 
 1 ^^«@ adukku 
 V.c^^,^<ffi(^ adanukku*' 
 ^fSjb<ssn'<s adatkdga* 
 
 ' &Q 
 
 j)j^&) adil 
 ^^s^eo adanil, &c. 
 
 * Here the increment an is inserted between adu and the 
 ending, with due observation of the rules of euphony, 
 f Here in is inserted. 
 
PRONOUNS. 
 
 33^ 
 
 6. Gen.— 
 
 ^susir avan ^<sn&r aval j^j^ieoiadiK^^^sffradan' 
 
 ^ewssr^ avanadu jtjswsiTzF^ avaladu j>\S'<ssr^ adinadu 
 
 avanuddiya 
 ^euiccflsk avanin 
 
 Loc. — 
 avanil 
 
 avunidattil 
 
 1. N..m.— 
 
 avaluddiya, &c. 
 
 aval it 
 avalidattil 
 
 Plural. 
 
 M. &F. 
 
 adinuddiya, &c. 
 
 adil, adanil 
 adinidattll 
 adanidattil 
 
 N. 
 
 ^euir avar* 
 ^(Suir<BS<siT avaryal* 
 
 2. Ace— 
 
 ^6ii(ss)ff avar-di 
 ^■Q/fr«'S?ir avargal-di 
 
 8. Iixstr.— 
 
 j^(^jriT&j avardl 
 
 ^ eu ir <s (SfT fT &j avargaldl 
 
 ^euQiTfrQ a/varodu 
 jtieufrsQ&rfT® avargalodu 
 
 4. Dat.— 
 
 ^eufT<s^'Sa(^ avargaluhhu 
 ^(Siiir&L-(^ avargatJcuX 
 ^eu([^<s(^ avai-uhku 
 ^(SviT,S(^ avarJcku 
 
 avargalukhdga, &c. 
 
 j)j(scD(su aval 
 ^60)<a;<S(gT7 avdigal 
 ^^s&T adugal 
 
 ^65)ffljaBSsTr avdigal-di 
 ^(Sup&Sip av-att-dif 
 
 ^(SS)(Sus(3frfTev avdigaldl 
 ^ennoQTf&o avattdl 
 ^enrr)fSl<^&o av-att-in-dl 
 ( j>l<5Si(Su&Q(Sf:n(^' avdigalodw 
 \^<sufbfiSIQi^® avattinddu 
 
 ^€S}6u<s^S(^ avdigaluTcku 
 ^(snpfico(^ av-att-it-ku 
 
 ^ so 6U cSS iCf^ S <S IT <£S 
 
 avdigalukkdga, &c. 
 
 * Used also in the singular honorifioally. 
 t Attn is inserted here (§ 16, c, exc. 2). + 0fr + (^=tl(5» 
 
 Tamil Grammar 8.-T. ^ 
 
34 PfiONOUNS. 
 
 5. Abl.— 
 
 ^(SuiT<S(srf^(sb avargalil ^(gs)en<sB(s^&o avdigalil 
 
 ^eutfl&j avaril, &c. ^eup)f6l&o avattil, &c. 
 
 ^. Gen.— 
 
 ^sviT avar ^<8Si^ 3: (^■cis)i_uj avdigaluddiya 
 
 ^euirsm avargal ^.^fhj]5l^^&3)L-Ujavattinudiihja 
 
 ^6ij(i^6B)L--Lu avaruddiya ^svibfiSl^t^ avaUin 
 
 j)j<SiJiT'sBi^&S)L-Lu avargaluddiija 
 
 7. Loc. — 
 
 ^(Si/fflei; avaril ^'S5)in>i<3iofP.&o avdiijalil 
 
 j)lsxjcrseff^&o avargalil, &c. ^svjd/jSI&j avattil, &c. 
 
 In the same way are declined : — 
 
 Demonstrative. 
 
 M. F. N. 
 
 @Qj..i3T ivan ^enmival ^ji^iidu this person or thing 
 e. 6b ear uvan ^(qij&t uval O-^ udu that yonder person or thing 
 
 Interrogative. 
 
 M. F. N. 
 
 ■crajssr evan ^(SiKsrr eval ot^ edu ") which person 
 
 .lurreuern- ydvan tufreum ydval lutr^ yddu j or thing? 
 
 The Interrogative luffr ydr or .^ir dr, "who," is used for 
 both masculine and feminine, and for both numbers, sr dr m 
 enna, "what," is an indeclinable, but lonrgr&sJLa en/jam, which 
 is sometimes used for ifc, is declined like lditld maram. by 
 changing the final m to ttu ; as, Dat. (otsw S3r^^cs@ ennattukku, 
 *'for what." 
 
 Tbe Keflexive Pronoun ^irssr tan (pi. ^itlo tdm or s'lrrkissm 
 tdngal), '* self," is shortened to ^sk tan (pi. ^th tarn or ^iki^m 
 iaugal) in the oblique cases; as, Ace. sing. ^siJfSlsor tamidl, pi. 
 <SLa<oG)L£i tammdi, ^iEj<as'2(Stf tangaldi; Instr. ^esri^&u tanndl, 6iQ. 
 
 The Distributive Pronouns " each," &c., are expressed by 
 •doubling the pronouns ^eussr avan, ^svm aval, j^j^i adit, 
 and ;#£'V tan-, as, ^<snscr(su^^hG)'^uj avanavanuddiya, " of each 
 person" (masc); ^esr^sai aiKfiujui tan-tan-kdriyam, "their re- 
 spective business." 
 
ADJECTIVES. 35 
 
 Adjectives. 
 
 17. (a) Attributive words are not declined, and are placed 
 before the nouns they qualify, as in English. These words are 
 either the inflectional bases of nouns, or verbal roots, or adjec- 
 tives and relative participles; e.g. .^jb^* lEo^ CiUk. mln, "river 
 fish"; cflrS) r^it Qudunir," hot wsiter" (rudu, "to be hot"); Qu(fhu 
 enir^^'sdr periya varttagan, " a* great merchant "; (SiQ-p^iesr 
 <s5rniS^Lh erudina Jcdyidam, *' the written letter" (see para. 31, i.). 
 
 (6) The Demonstrative Adjective ^^^ anda, "that," 
 ** those," g)^,<§^ inda, " this," '* these," and the Interrogative 
 Adjective <ojjs;S tnda, " which ? " are also indeclinable ; as, 
 j){!3<tf LJ*«c5(eT5«rffl5 anda paruhkaluTcku, " to those cows." In 
 the same way are used the prefixes a, i, tc, and e, respectively 
 to point out things at a distance, things near, and things 
 yonder, and to ask a question (of. § 10 and 12, i. b). 
 
 (c) The past relative participle (see below, para. 31, i.) of ^ a, 
 "to be," "to become," namely =^«jr ana or ^Quj dgiya (forms 
 of ^i,iiS'cQi dyina and ^Si^sr OAjina), added to any noun will 
 put this noun in attributive relation to the one following ; as, 
 ^ievLDif<o6i l^l-(SCj£u nllam-dfia pudavdi, "blue cloth" {ti'dani 
 being the colour blue) ; same as /euuL/i-KDo.' nUa-p-pudavdl. 
 So also ^<F#(60)£)uj QajiTQ<9=u taccan-dgiya Yucep, "Joseph the 
 carpenter," and QiuaQ-d^Qus'si ^jjl'o ^s^-g^^ Yocep e?i?jnm taccan, 
 " the carpenter who is called Joseph " (ennum being the future 
 relative participle of en, " to say or call "). The {present srdrQir) 
 engira is colloquially used for the future ennum. 
 
 The relative participles ^mm ulla, "containing, possessing 
 within itself" (from root ul), ^prn atta (from j^ru aru, "to 
 cease"), and ^evevn-^ illdda (from ^&o il, "not"), as well as 
 iv^oor ma (Sanskrit hina, "devoid of," pp. p. of root ha), are 
 added to nouns to form adjectives in the same way as dtja. 
 <xenerally uUa and ana have the same difference in meaning 
 as their negatives atta and illdda ; e.g. Qj5<3'(Lp<s(Te{r ^itlu iwqam- 
 ulla tdy, "affectionate mother"; QjF'ff'LnjbjD Qussars^fr^ neram- 
 atta pen(;ddi, " affection- less wife." 
 
 For the Comparative and Superlative Degrees, see Syntax. 
 
 * This is the inflectional base of c^.i9^ . Nouns ending in ajn may, 
 instead of following this rule, simply drop final m; as, pana-p-pe({i, 
 "money-box." Cf. also irvppu-k-kadavu, "iron door," iruppu being 
 the adj. form of irumhu, "iron." Similarly maruttUy adj. form of 
 'narundUf "medicine." 
 
36 DEUIVATIVES. 
 
 Derivative Nouns. 
 
 18. From primitive stems of nouns, adjectives and verbtr. 
 Derivative Nouns iji Irequent use are formed by the addition 
 of the following suffixes : — 
 
 ia) (srotn maz=Eiio;lish -ne>s or -hood; as, ^ tl, "fire^ 
 evil," ^«5)/.n ti-mdiy "'.wickedness, vice"; Q^ Qirttr 
 "small," Qljnif^LD (;irumai, " smalhiess "; f^eo naly 
 "good," fbsb&oLB namndi, "goodness" {I -\- 111=^71711) \. 
 r-X^l^dr dl or ^s>3cr an, "man," ^^^ohe,:::Lo dnmdi, "manli- 
 ness" (/+m=«m); ^.■ir^ loofi hrmrji, ' maiden," :^ skssfc:^:-:: 
 A-aw/?rm(M, " maidenhood or virginity." See a'so Verbal 
 Nouns, paras. 32-37. 
 
 (b) (BviTsri van, Lancer undn, <sr'' irsca kdran (from Skt. vat, mat 
 and Icdra), ^etfl dli (m. and f.), ^mek dlan (m.), ^l.^l 
 dtti (P.), cF/'oiS (;ali (m. and f.), &c. ; as, jEl ■^ (sn it sisr niQa- 
 vdn, "honest man," <s0osS'Lc>i(osr lalvi-ynOn, "learned 
 man," fh.. eii s -s: n u sk IcuH-h-Jcdran, " hibourer," u.^^-^.id) 
 putti-cMi, "wise person," nk.iLL-.:f&f\ hutt-dli, "colleague." 
 
 (c) Tho personal termination?,* or lather the contracted; 
 forms of the personal pronoun of the third person., 
 namely : — 
 
 Singular. Pluial. 
 
 avan, an, on, an U^^S ^^^ f^'S =5^^ 
 „ ~. 7 ."-,"., civar, ar. Or, ar 
 
 hem. ^SL&: aval, ^^m al, ^_(ov. a I ' 
 
 Neut. j^i^ adu, ^ du ^ss^en avdi, ^<sot ana, ^ a 
 
 Final u of adjectives often becomes i before these suffixes.. 
 ^sk&sr c.imia, " small." 
 r M. Qsisr&sr(diJ6sr Qinnavan, a lad 
 
 Sing. -< F. ^(osreareum rirmaval, a lass 
 
 (N. ^mm^ qinnadu, that which is small 
 
 M.F. ^£(jrsorsu/r(«6ff) rinnavar (gal) , s mall people 
 
 Plar. < N. BsarisGr60<su(<sm)riTmavdi{yal) 
 
 small thinors 
 
 or ff/szTSsr <;iima, j " » 
 
 * Personal terminations of the first and second persons also can be 
 added to nouns to form conjugated appellatives, as pdvi-y-en^ "I a»' 
 sinner" {pdvi, "sinner"). See para. 50. 
 
DERIVATIVES. 87 
 
 QuQ^ peril, " great." 
 
 j' M. OuifliLKSLKssr peri-y-avan, . a great man 
 
 SiiiLT. - F. Qi u M iu (Sum per ly aval, a great woman 
 
 In. QuiBcu^ periyadii, a great thing 
 
 i M. F. Gud-lQiLifrir periydr, great persons 
 
 riiir. N. Quir)ujeo<su{<3im) i>eriyavai{gal),l ,. 
 
 ( or Qu&liu periya, ' j ^^'^^* tlungs 
 
 uirQ^iff'Lb* paraderam, "foreign land." 
 
 CM. ujr(n;:5<F^;Siif^'paradcraft-d/j, a foreign man 
 ng. -N F. u[rQ^<F^<?iii eir paraderatfdl, a foreign woman 
 (^N. uiiQpcf^jS^paraderattadu, a foreign thing 
 /' M. F. ujrQsiF^ifirn («^r" ) ) 
 
 pi,„. ) paradcrattaiigal). I ^"*"''^" i'"""'""' 
 
 ( parade,-"Uavai(gal). j *°'''^'g" t'''"g^ 
 
 l^'rom the adjectives oT6U6u/r elld and <5==£aj ragaJa (Skt. 
 
 'k-aJa), both meaning "all," are formed the nouns .sTgusv/r^ai 
 
 ' llrir-um (or sreuC^toV/r^tii ellOr-um) ;nid ^.aeu^as <^agalar-um, 
 
 ' ;ill persons"; OT6V6u/rLn elldm and -r<«w(LLif.D ragahim-um, 
 
 * all animals " or " all things." These, being words ex- 
 
 j-rcssing universality, take the affix '^/n am. When thev are 
 
 a-lJHctives, tlie ultix um is added to the noim which they 
 
 ijiuiHfv ; as. bin):evif lSI ov'^^i <S'^-i sjLn elld pilldigaluJcJc'-um, "to 
 
 all clnldren"; #c5su j,;«j)ir '/-/(caflaj.CTjt/:) ragala iurdirdnigal-uiu, 
 
 •* all ladies." 
 
 The noun-forms elldr-uia and raqalar-um are declined like 
 itvar (see para. 1(>. b), adding nm. to each case- termination ; as, 
 . • oi)fi\):i Qh-if^LB elldvuhlc-um, "to all persons." 
 
 ^T6U6u nh tlldm (i.e. Md-\-uin) is declined with the insertion 
 of the increment aHji ( para. 15, c, 2); as, Dat. sreuaj/rsij/D^^^Lb 
 elld-v-attii-kk'-am. Gen. (p.eo<f!\):^ ^jrtB^Di'r^ elld-v-att-in-um ; 
 whilst ^<ai6U(Lp(h ragalam-um follows the declension of nouns 
 endiug in m (j^ara. 15, c-, 1) ; as, Dat. .-f&tiv/s^i's^La ragaJattu- 
 hlc-tini, Loc. ^^(io^^^^ryji.h ragidaiV-ll-um, the affix um l)eing 
 added each time. 
 
 * The personal en'liiio;s nro added to the inflectional bases of nouns 
 (cf. para. 15, c, exc. i). 'Ihis word is often written and pronounced 
 
38 
 
 NUMERALS AND NUMERAL ADJECTIVES. 
 
 The Numerals. 
 
 19. 
 
 Cardinals. 
 
 6 
 7 
 8 
 9 
 
 10 
 11 
 
 Tamil 
 Signs. 
 
 IK. 
 
 
 Name. 
 
 (^ssr^ onru 
 (vulg. (o^ss^^t! onnu) 
 
 ^rrsm® irandu 
 (vulg. QirsssT® rendu) 
 
 ^m^^ munru 
 (vulg. ^^0)1 munu) 
 
 jFfT^j ndlu, 
 jS'^sisr,^ ndngu 
 
 ^jFj^ aindu 
 (vulg. <j)/©<5^ anju) 
 
 ^^ dru 
 (qJq^ eru 
 (oJiL® ettu 
 (S^eoiu^ onhadu 
 u^^ pattu 
 u^Q^sw-rn padin-onru 
 
 Adjectival Form. 
 
 90 on/, before con- 
 sonants* ; gp/'r Of 
 before vowels f 
 g)(V5 iru, FFi'r Ir, 
 ^(Tsm® irandu 
 (g)(i7ifflj/r iruvar, 
 " two persons ") 
 (Lp mu, ^ TtlU, 
 
 ^serjj/ munru 
 (^(oiirr mfivar, 
 "three persons") 
 
 ndngu, /strssr nan 
 (r^ir&b(SijiT adlvar, 
 "four persons") 
 gg ai, ^/i aimy 
 
 ^/?.^ aindu 
 (^<affr aivar, 
 ''five persons") 
 ^^ aru, r:^joi dru 
 (oT(Lp eru, ^(Lp eru 
 (STsssr en, istlL® ettu 
 [_padin 
 u^ padu, u^ek 
 u^!Q(^(f^padin-oru 
 
 * As 9(5 QufTi^LUsk oru podiyan, " a boy." 
 
 t As gofT <5T(Lp^^ 6r eruttu, "a letter"; cg^susw oruvan or 90^ 
 fisk oruttan, "a certain male person"; 90^^ orutti, **a certain 
 female." 
 
THE NUMERALS. 
 
 39 
 
 
 Tamil 
 
 
 Signs. 
 
 12 
 
 (Da. 
 
 13 
 
 udm. 
 
 14 
 
 (d^ 
 
 15 
 
 u)(5) 
 
 16 
 
 a)<Sr 
 
 17 
 
 a)(5T 
 
 18 
 
 a)=(y 
 
 19 
 
 iDa 
 
 20 
 
 a_(D 
 
 21 
 
 2_« 
 
 22 
 
 a_a. 
 
 23 
 
 2_/S. 
 
 30 
 
 /HLU) 
 
 40 
 
 v^iD 
 
 60 
 
 ©iD 
 
 60 
 
 4fr(D 
 
 70 
 
 STU) 
 
 80 
 
 «^(D 
 
 90 
 
 <*iD 
 
 100 
 
 (XT 
 
 101 
 
 irrs 
 
 200 
 
 S-ffT 
 
 800 
 
 iR.rrr 
 
 400 
 
 ^frr 
 
 600 
 
 @irr 
 
 600 
 
 Srirr 
 
 Name. 
 
 uesTsaftireksr® pan-n-?randu* (u^(safl({^(avir 
 pan-n-h'uvar, "twelve persons") 
 
 u^POJQ^sk^ paclln-munrn 
 
 ufii^^j padindlu,f u^^esri^ padi'ndnguf 
 
 u^i^scrjs^ padin-aindu 
 
 u^<^^ jb%din-aru 
 
 u^i'J&5r(ip padin-nru 
 
 u^Q&stlL® padin-etiu 
 
 u^Qfiirmu^i patf 'Onhadu 
 
 @(5LJ^ iru'hadu, or ^_x)q^su^^ iru-vadu 
 
 ^(iT^u^Q;SireorjQi iru-haW -onru, or ^Q^^fSy 
 Q;S!ir&kr^)j iruvatf onnu 
 
 ^(mu<s^F^® iruhatt^-irandu 
 
 ^Q^u^^^ip^^ iruhatiu-TnunrM, &C. 
 
 (ipuu^ muppadu 
 
 jS(Tp)U^ ndt-padu [i.e. iidl+padu] 
 
 gg/.DU^ aim-hadu 
 
 ^^u^ aru-hadu 
 
 (oT(Lpu^ eru-badu, or (oT(Lp<su^ eru-vadu 
 
 ST(saoTU^ en-hadu 
 
 Q^fTsm,^}irsJ tonnuru [i.e. tol+nuru] 
 
 ^n)i niiru (Adjectival — ,m^<S>^ vuttu) 
 
 ^rn)G(fri'ssrjx nuU'-onru ; 103, nuttu-munru^ 
 
 @Qy)MSi iru-mlru L<*^- 
 
 (ip^^^ mu-n-nuru 
 
 jFir ^i rmi nd^-nuru 
 
 ^^^iTMii ain-nuru 
 
 ^j3/^f ji/ aru-nunc 
 
 * Pan is a contracted form of padin. Here final & is doubled before 
 nitial i. See above, para. 12, iv., exc. 
 
 t Combinations of fadin + noXu and of padin + nangu. H ere n -♦- n = ».. 
 See iibove, para. 12, vlii. 
 
40 
 
 THE NUMERALS. 
 
 
 Tamil 
 
 
 Signs. 
 
 700 
 
 erm- 
 
 800 
 
 ^frr 
 
 000 
 
 SifTT 
 
 .1000 
 
 ^ 
 
 1001 
 
 ^d5 
 
 1100 
 
 ^fTT or 
 
 
 <s<sa)(D 
 
 1200 
 
 ^2^iTr or 
 
 
 <fEc2_(D(D 
 
 1900 
 
 sd;<3i,,ifr or 
 
 
 <sBSi,idiD 
 
 1906 
 
 ^is^rrrsr 
 
 2000 
 
 ^^ 
 
 3000 
 
 fTLSk 
 
 100.000 
 
 m^ 
 
 Name. 
 
 sT(Lp.^^ eru-nuru 
 
 (ST6m^}ir^ en-nuru 
 
 Q^fr<dtr'ofrfT[iSrrLD tol-l-dyiram 
 
 ^uSl/rLD dyiram (Adj. — .^r.uSl[r^^ dyirattu) 
 
 ^n3(j^Q^fT€sr^ dyiraW-onrifj 
 
 ^iiSiT^Q^frQ^^^ dyiraW 'Oru-nuru 
 
 ^j,ii^F^^(i^^^^ dyiraW -iru-nUru 
 
 ^ii^F^,^^Q^fTm(S(rnaSlFLh dyiraUu-t-toI-l- 
 
 [dyiram 
 ^ir(T[j^^^^^Qp.\ <sh (off J aSi J £ ^ J ^ 
 
 [or-dyirattu-t-tol-l'dyiratV-dru 
 ^jTimi—iTijSnLo ir and' -dyiram 
 ^<su IT liSiij Lc Tn.u-v-dyiranif &c. 
 •^eviL'S'Lh Hat ram 
 
 Ordinals. 
 
 20. Ordinals are formed by the addition of ^^th dm or 
 4^^^- <^vadu to the cardinals, Mdth the exception of ^sk^ 
 onru, which makes (ip^el mudal, (tps^sDirm mudal-dm, or 
 (ip^6u/ra/^ mudal-dvadu, "first," and In compounds ^ij.jCa 
 or-dm,a,s (il^uu^(J^,Tri ir^h mupjmW-nrdm, " the thirtv-tirst." 
 The form in dm is used only as an adjective, as ^/ssGT^aCa 
 ^(ohj,^.^Lh iranddm pustagnm, "the second book"; that in dvadu 
 may be either an adjective or an adverb, as rF.rsk ;5;reo,r^^ 
 QutrQeoTssr ndn ndldvadu pOnen, " I went fourth." 
 
 21. By rej. eating the first shortened svllable or letter of 
 the numbers up to ten, with the exception of nine, Distribu- 
 hves are lormed ; thus : — 
 
 ^!SuQ<ou[Tmjrij ovvonru, one bv one • 
 
 ^djs£lirmn® ivvirandu, two by two, in twos; 
 
 QpLo^'shrjrx muuimunru, three by three; 
 
 jf^,^e^, namidlu, or ;B^ou^drr&) 'iianndiuiu, by fours; 
 
VERBS, 41 
 
 ^60)uj^^ aiyaindu, or ^<su<c6)'su^^ aiwaindu, by fives; 
 
 ^eu<3uir^ avvdru, by sixes ; 
 
 ^Qj(osij(Lp evvtlni, by sevens; 
 
 'irrGLiQeuLL® fvvettu, by eights; 
 
 uuua^^ pappattu, or usuensi^ pawattu, by tens. 
 
 22. Fractions. 
 
 ^V 8 <S'iT@sS kdni 
 
 /o ^ (if^-k<3Bi(SsS mukhdni 
 
 ■Yu u LoiT md\ ^^Q a^ ardi-md 
 
 y_ ^ ^ C Lc>tT<sir(os6h md-gdni, or 
 ° ( (sS.tfL^ vJraui 
 
 ^n ^, ( is) ii" '^«5r &Ln[r i ra ?idu- 
 
 1 6 
 
 2 O 
 
 
 "^^ T ( wi a, or g) Lo rr /nt- m d 
 
 -2 fJv) ^<iar^LCiiT munru-md 
 
 ■«% «^ ( jBii^jLDtr ndln-md, or 
 
 i-e.\ \jBii^(^Lni! ndnrju-md 
 
 \ fi^ ^(8S)sr<k<siTeo ardik-kdl 
 
 ^ ^ ^looir ardi 
 
 ^ ^ (Lps<sir6v mukhdl 
 
 [N.B.— In mixed fractions, as IJ, the final u of the numeral 
 is dropped before an initial vowel, or is changed into e 
 Ix'lore a consonant, as onra -\- ardl=^ onr ardi,\\,2i\i^ o/iru + 
 kdl=.onrc kdl, 1^, not oni kdl, which means 'one quarter.'] 
 
 Verbs. 
 
 23. (a) The Tamil verb has three principal tenses, namely, 
 the Present, the Past, and the Future, and one Negative 
 form without any indication of time ; e.g. 
 
 r^sfP.'skiConosia kuli-kkir-erij I bathe, Istpers. sing. Present. 
 
 {^<sS^Q<!j^ kali-tt-en, I bathed, „ „ Past. 
 
 f^biBuQujjj kuli-pp'tn, I shall bathe, 
 
 il do not bathe, or 
 I did not bathe, or 
 I shall not bathe, 
 
 Future. 
 
 (Nega- 
 tive.) 
 
 Let us now analyse these lour forms. We see that tliey 
 all have the unmodified root kuli, and the ending en, the sign 
 of the 1st person singular. TIjo first three, moreover, have 
 each a middle increment, different in eacii case, whicii obviously 
 distinguishes tlie tense; whilst, in tlie fourth ther-- is no such 
 middle- particle, the personal ending being added directly to 
 the root with due observation of the usual rules of euphony. 
 
42 
 
 VERBS. 
 
 (h) The personal endings are : — 
 
 Singular. 
 
 1st pars. en {al, an, and en*) 
 
 ay (i and ai*) 
 
 2nd 
 
 3rd 
 
 Masc. an (an*) ") 
 
 Fern, dl (al*) j 
 
 Neut. du or aclu, ru (or 
 itUi) {a and ddu con- 
 fined to the negative 
 verb), and um ffuture) 
 
 Plural. 
 am (am, dm, em, em*) 
 ir or Irgal (ir*) 
 
 dr or drgal (ar*) 
 
 a, ana* (a confined to the 
 negative verb), adugal 
 (vulgar), and um (future) 
 
 24, The personal endings are added to verbs as follows : — 
 (a) Present Tense. 
 Singular. 
 1st person (^(Sffi'kQQ/D^ kuli-hkir-en 
 
 2nd 
 
 ST bathe, 
 I 
 
 3rd 
 
 am bathing 
 thou bathest 
 he bathes 
 she bathes 
 
 1" 
 
 bathes (neut.) 
 
 we bathe 
 > you bathe 
 
 r^.s^'kQQrj'Cu Jculi-kJclr-dy 
 (^<oif)iQ(n?ssr kuli'lckir-dn 
 (f,'^,iS^n;(srT kuli-kk ir-dl 
 @ srfl 5 «//0^ kuii-kkir-adu 
 (^siB'sQsarp^ kuli-kkinr-adu 
 
 Plural. 
 1st person (^e^^kSiQ^nr^ia kuli-kkir-6m 
 2nd 1 (§<3ifl<s>&f§a kuli-kkir-ir 
 
 " \('ff)<si^mQjBh<s(5(T kull-kkir-irgal 
 
 ( ^,(3rt\i'&i(rrriT kuli-kklr-dr 7,, , ^, , - > 
 
 \ @6rB^^.'(^/f*^" kuU-kkvr.drgal j they bat he(m.f.) 
 j (^srfl-sQssrjDesr kuli-khinr-ana ") they bathe 
 V (^ oYf) ^ Qp^ <s m kuH-kkir'adugal ) (neut.) 
 
 [n and aw in kulikkinradu and in kuUkkinrana are probably 
 euphonic insertions. See also para. 1 5, c, exc. 2.] 
 
 (h) Fast Tense. 
 
 Singular. 
 1st (§<s^^Q^sir kuli-tt-en I bathed 
 
 2nd (^^rfl^.^/riL kuli-tt-dy thou bathedst 
 
 3rd 
 
 * Poetical or rare forms hardly employed in common Tamil. 
 
VEEB8. 
 
 43 
 
 C @ sS^;S a esr kuli-tt' an 
 
 3rd< (^etf^^^rren kull-tt-al 
 
 (^@6tfl^^^ huli-ti-adu 
 
 Plural. 
 
 im 
 
 1st f-^^^ ^Q ^ rr La kuli-tt- 
 2nd (§etf^ 5^iT(<B5&r) kuli-tt-ir (or -irgal) 
 3rd I ^3^.3i^^fr{<£Bm) kuli-tt- dr {gal) 
 ( (gerfl^^a^ssr huH-tt-ana^ 
 
 he bathed 
 
 she bathed 
 
 it batlied (neut.) 
 
 we bathed 
 you ])athed 
 they bnthed (m. f .) 
 they bathed (neut.) 
 
 [' The singular is generally used for this form.] 
 
 (c) Future Tense. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 1st (^(sSuQuQsr kuli-pp-en 
 
 2nd (^eSuuAiL kuli-ppdy 
 
 ( (^(srf^uufreiir kuli-pp-dn 
 
 3rd •< (^erf^uuir&T kuli-pp-dl 
 
 ( @ stP<«(^ld kuH-hk-um * 
 
 I shall bathe 
 thou wilt bathe 
 he will bathe 
 she will bathe 
 it will bathe (neut.) 
 
 Plural. 
 
 1st @6yf?LjG*u/rzi kuli-pp'()m we shall bathe 
 
 2nd (§&fiuLSiT(s(crT) kuli-pp-lr(gal) you will bathe 
 
 3rd I (S^^^'^'^i'^^) kuli-pp-dr{gal) they will bathe (m. f.) 
 
 \ (^syfi«(^LD kuli-kk-iim" they will bathe (neut.) 
 
 [* The third person neuter of the future is the same in the 
 singular and the plural. It is formed by adding kkum 
 to the roots of those verbs which take the middle incre- 
 ment (or tense-sign) kkiru in the present, and utyi to those 
 which take kiru{\.Q. giru, see para. 27), y and v being often 
 inserted for the sake of euphony; thus, (suen-Q^QCorDesr 
 valai'(u)-gir-en, "I grow," makes (SumQ^Lo valar-um; Q<3'uj 
 QQpelsr Qey-gir-en, ** I do," 0<^tZj(L/tii Qey-y-um ; ^^uQjD^ 
 irdi-gir-adu, "it roars," ^66)iriqLD irdi-y-um ; jtjQpQQjnear 
 aru-gir-en, "I weep," ^(ip<a/^h aru-v-um; but ^(LpQ^^ 
 dru-gir-adu, from root ^i^ "be depressed," gives ^cLpLn 
 dr-um (cf. § 12, i. a); suq^QQjdsot varu-gir-en, "I come," 
 ei]QT)U^ var-um; ^(r^QCo/Dssr taru-gir-en, '*! give," ^q^ld 
 tar-um (the roots being taken as var and tar, not vd and 
 td). There are, however, a few roots which take kum 
 
,^ VERBS. 
 
 (or gum) instead of um; as, iS&j nil, ** stand," Sjh'-^Lh 
 nit-kum (l + lc=tjc) ; (J-ssfr hel, " hear." Q<sel1(^lo het-hum 
 {l-\-h=tk)\ Qr5iT nd,"Siche," (Dj5iTr^Lh no-gum or Q.^.t^^lo 
 nO'V-um ; Quit po, ** go," Qurrr^Lh po-gum, contracted to 
 QuiTLct pom.'] 
 
 (d) Negative. 
 Singular. 
 
 ^etf^Coiusk Jculi-y-en 
 '~:sif^iun i/j hull- y- ay 
 ,i5if^Luii 6sr huli-y-dn 
 ^etf^Luir&T kuli-y-dl 
 (^eiBtufT,^ kuli-y-ddu | 
 (@<oYflaj/r huli-y-d) ) 
 
 Plural. 
 
 1st (^isif^QiufTLD kuli-y-dni 
 2nd ^siflLSir(d5m) kuli-y-ir(gal) 
 o J ( @(srf)(L'ff/r(<«6rr) kull-y-drijgaV) 
 \@6iftujn kuli-y-d 
 
 I do not bathe 
 thou dost not bathe 
 he does not bathe 
 she does not bathe 
 
 it does not bathe (neut.) 
 
 we do not bathe 
 you do not bathe 
 they do not bathe (ni. f.) 
 they do not bathe (neut.) 
 
 25. This regular negative, with the exception of some 
 persons of it, is not much used colloquially. The one in 
 common use is obtained by the addition of (g'guSou illdi, " not," 
 to the so-called infinitive of the verb, without any regard to 
 time, number, or person. Thus, ri^(oiflm& kulikka being the 
 infinitive of kuli (see below, para. 38), we get 
 
 Singular — > 
 
 ^fT(oi!i ndn 
 ni, or //r nir 
 ^eusir avan 
 ^sum aval 
 eSV^' cidu 
 Plural— 
 ^ T/i nam, or P5n-rk)<s<s{r ndngal 
 jiiT nlr, or ^n&m nir gal 
 ^(suiT avar or ^ sw /r « err avargal 
 ^srosi; avdi (neut.) 
 
 kulikka- 
 v-illdi 
 
 I 
 
 thou 
 he 
 she 
 it 
 
 we 
 
 you or ye 
 
 thev 
 
 do, did, 
 shall, or 
 will not 
 bathe 
 
VEIIBS. 
 
 •4& 
 
 ^ 26. A still more common neo-ative is formed by the addi- 
 tion of illdl to the neuter participial noun (§ 32 -83), present, 
 past and future ; as, 
 
 j^T^^r [kallJcJciradu-\-illdi ^culikkiracV illdi j 
 
 y thou, 
 
 P ui, \kulittadu +illdi =lculittadHlldi 
 
 &C. I ^6lfiLJU^i-\-§)&0^z=(^orf^LJU^Gb'uc. i 
 
 \ kulippada + tllai = kulippad'lllill J 
 
 do not 
 
 bathe 
 
 did not 
 
 bathe 
 
 'will not 
 
 bathe 
 
 [See also para. 47 on Auxiliary and Defective verbs.] 
 
 27. In the foregoing example, the middle increment or siun 
 of thi" present tense is kkir, that is kkijni, («ffi'^) witli the 
 elision of the final short u beloie the personal terminations; 
 the sign of the past is it. (^s^), and that of the future is 
 pj) (tl'LJ). These are strong forms, and are, as a rule, used 
 in the conjui^'ation of verbs with an '* active -transitive " or 
 causative sionifieation. There are, however, very many verbs, 
 both transitive and intransitive, which either take the weaker 
 FORMS kir or kiru, pronounced giru (Sjoi), in the present, 
 t or d (^) or nd (j^^) or irj* (@5?r) iu the past, and p or b 
 (u) or V (qj) in the future, or follow a middle course by 
 taking the strong forms kkir and consequently pp in the 
 present and future, and the weak or middle form nd in the= 
 past. Thus: — 
 
 Koot. 
 
 Present. 
 
 Past. 
 
 Future. 
 
 
 fQjBii Q(Srr)ek 
 
 Qf^tuQ^sk 
 
 Q^iL-Gcsusar 
 
 
 neij-gir-en 
 I weave 
 
 ney-d-en 
 I wove 
 
 ney-v-(?rj 
 
 I shall weave 
 
 
 Qrsuji^'cfy^i'u 
 
 QjSiu^rrdj 
 
 Qj^i'u^iinu 
 
 we.ive 
 
 7iey-(jlr-dy 
 thou weavest 
 
 ney-d-dy 
 thou wovest 
 
 ney-v-dy 
 
 thou wilt weave 
 
 
 QjSl'u^QT/SSr 
 
 QiSii'^Tssr 
 
 Gj IE i'u (Sv 1' (sk 
 
 
 ney-gir-dn 
 he weaves 
 
 ney-d'dn 
 he wove 
 
 ney-v-dn 
 
 he will weave 
 
 
 N &c. &c. 
 
 &c. &c. 
 
 &c. &c. 
 
 * Strictly speaking, i is the sign of the past, n being only a euphonic 
 insertion. 
 
46 
 
 VERBS. 
 
 fresr 
 sav 
 
 / (oTei^QQrosk 
 V en-gir-en 
 \ I say 
 
 en-rfir-dy 
 thou say est 
 
 or 
 
 ap- 
 proach I 
 
 revu-gir-tjn 
 I approach 
 
 reru-gir-dy 
 thou 
 
 approacliest 
 
 &c. &c. 
 
 
 speak ) I speak 
 \ &c. Ac. 
 
 nadi-hhir-en 
 I walk 
 
 naf/a-kkir-dy 
 
 thou walkest 
 
 &c. &c. 
 
 ;f. 
 
 walk 
 
 en-r-en 
 I said 
 
 en-r-dy 
 thou saidst 
 &c. &c. 
 
 qer-nd-en 
 
 I approached 
 
 rer-nd-dji 
 thou didst 
 approach 
 &c. &c. 
 
 'j)t(;-in-en 
 I spoke 
 &c. &c. 
 
 nada-vd-en 
 I walked 
 
 en-h-^n 
 I shall say 
 
 (oJsi)TUlT\L 
 
 en-b-dy 
 thou wilt say 
 
 &c. &c. 
 
 reru-v-en 
 
 I shall approach 
 
 (J<F(75(Slin-tL./ 
 
 Qeru-v-dy 
 
 thou wilt approach 
 &c. etc. 
 
 pegu-v-en 
 I shall speak 
 
 &c. etc. 
 (Bi—uQwok 
 nada-pp-en 
 I shall walk 
 
 nada-vd-dy nada-pp-dy 
 
 thou walkedst thou wilt walk 
 
 &c. &Q.. i&C. i&C. 
 
 Exceptions : — 
 
 (a) Short dissyllabic roots of this weak conjugation, 
 which end in (^ hu, ® du, and ^ r-w, do not often take 
 the " middle- increment " in the past, but simply drop 
 the final n and double the consonant Jc, d, or r before 
 adding the personal terminations; as, jF'^Qsosk nak-h-tn, 
 past tense of ;f@ nagu, " laugh "; <c^lLG'l_£OT- QUt-t-c/j, of 
 
 * i.e. ST si)T ^ ^ + <qj isisr (ew+t+en), ear -|- ^ having become ^jb. See 
 para. 12, viii. 
 
 t The final sliort u of roots such as geru, pefu, not being radical, is 
 often eb'rled. CA'. para. 12, i. (a). 
 
VERBS. 
 
 47 
 
 4F® (ludu, "bum"; and QuroQfDz^ pet-t-cn, of Qu^ 
 ^erw, "obtain." (Cf. 12, iv., exception.) (Sufr® pddu. 
 "put," also follows this rule, as its past tense is 
 Q u fT lLQ i^ek pot-t-en. Thus : — 
 
 Eoot. 
 nayu 
 (;tidu 
 idu 
 
 > laugh 
 y burn 
 
 ] 
 
 give 
 
 Present. 
 \ nrnju-gir-en 
 \ r^udu-fjir-en 
 \ idU'Cjlr-en 
 
 Past. 
 nak'h-en 
 
 r^ut-t-en 
 
 it-t'Pn 
 
 Future. 
 nagu-v-en 
 (;udu-v-en 
 idu-v-en 
 
 peru, ) \ peru-gir-en pet-t-i 
 
 vn peru-v-Cn 
 
 {h) Some verbs of this class form their past teuses in 
 both ways ; e.g. 
 
 Root. 
 
 ^(3 I 
 tagu ) 
 
 befit 
 
 Present. 
 -gir-en 
 
 Past. 
 
 
 ^ > exceed 
 migu ) 
 
 migu-gir-en 
 
 aru 
 
 cease 
 
 aru-gir-en 
 
 ssr 
 
 tagu-nd-en 
 or ;is-i(S^^ 
 tak-k-en 
 
 migii-nd-en 
 
 or LSi-iCn&sir 
 mik-k-en 
 
 aru-nd-en 
 
 or ^pQpssT 
 at't-en 
 
 Future. 
 tagu-v-en 
 
 migu-ven 
 
 aru-v-en 
 
 28. The following verbs may serve as models for the forma- 
 tion of the present, the past, and the future, as well as the 
 infinitive treated of in para. 38 : — 
 
 1. Root: Lj^L padi, "learn or read." 
 
 Present. Past. Future. 
 
 {jiif.-&£^Qrossr uis^^(S^asr ui^uQuek 
 
 padi-kkir-en padi-tt-en 
 
 padi-pp-en 
 
 Infinitive. 
 
48 
 
 VERBS. 
 
 2. Root : l9[^ pidi, " seize.' 
 
 iSiiS^-k&'^niD'oer 
 
 1)1(1 i-kkir -en 
 
 3. Root: seifl kali, 
 
 ka/i-kkir-en 
 
 4. Root: eun^vdci, 
 
 vdci-kkir-en 
 
 fidi- It-en 
 
 rejoice. 
 
 kal -ff-en 
 
 pidi-pp-en 
 
 kali-pp-en 
 
 read. 
 
 (SUil 
 
 vdrA-tt-en 
 
 
 vdcl-pp-en 
 
 Root: ^soLp ardi, "invite." 
 
 ard'i-kkir-en 
 
 ardi-tt-en 
 
 ardi-pp-en 
 
 6. Root : <B!T Jed, " preserve. 
 
 kd'kkir-en hd-tt-en kd-pp-en 
 
 7. Root: u® padu, " lie down." 
 
 padu-kkir-en 
 
 8. Root: 
 
 iru-hkir-en 
 
 9. Root: 
 
 ira-hkir-en 
 
 U® ^^;S<ok 
 
 padu-tt-en 
 D(75 iru, " be." 
 
 iru-nd-en 
 ira, " die." 
 
 ira-nd-en 
 
 -PP' 
 
 ^rj^Lj(DU(Ssr 
 iru-pp-en 
 
 ira-pp-en 
 
 pidi-kka 
 hali'kka 
 
 vdri-kkou 
 
 ardi-kka 
 
 hd-kka 
 
 padu-kkc^ 
 
 iru-kka 
 
 ira-kka 
 
 10. Root: ^Lp dr (or ^(ip dru), "be deep." 
 
 dru-gir-adu dr-nd-adu dr-um dr-a 
 
 11. Root : ^«l5 igar (or @<ffi(ip igaru), " reproach." 
 
 igaru-gir-en igar-nd-en igaru-v-en igar-a. 
 
 12. Root: (?<9=/r ger (or Q.F(f^ qeru), " approach." 
 
 Q<FQ^S>QfD6sr Qfg^rr^Q^ssr Q<3'Q^Qeu<oir Q^jr 
 
 qeru-gir-en Qer-nd-en qeru-v-en cer-a 
 
VERBS. 4^ 
 
 13. Eoot: Q(su ve (or Q(Sij(^ vegu), "■ buru." 
 
 su^Qn)eifr Qsu^C^^^ QsijQ(Sussr Q<su6u 
 
 ve-gir-en ve-nd-en ve-v-en, or ve-v-a, or 
 
 (root shortened) (^evrs^leieor Qsu <as 
 
 v^gv-v-en vega 
 
 14. Eoot: QiB(T no (or Qjsrrc.^ nogu), "ache." 
 
 %0-gir-en no-nd-en nO-v-iJn, or no-v-a, or 
 
 (root shortened) Q js n (s.Q gu sir Q_!5fr<EB 
 
 vogu-v-en nog -a 
 
 15. Root: <^/r qd (or <f^@ (^dgu), *' die." 
 
 (^d-gir-en ge-tt-en gd-v-en, or gd-v-a, or 
 
 (irregular) <f tr (^'J eu sisr ^n-,f5 
 
 gdgu-v-en (^dg-a 
 
 16. Root: *^(T5 taru (or ^tr td), ** give." 
 
 taru-gir-en ta-nd-en taru-v-en tar-a 
 
 17. Root: *(su(if) varu (or oi/r vd), " <ome." 
 eisQ^QQpsisr su^Q^ear eu(mQ<siJsin- euF 
 varu-gir-en va-nd-en varu-v-en var-a 
 
 18. Root: Q<ffiu r^ey, "do." 
 
 Q^iiQQpsar Q^iiiQ^ear Qi^LuQeueBr Q<9=ujuj^ 
 
 gey-gir-en Qey-d-en Qey-v-en <^^y-y-(x 
 
 19. Root: Qui'u /iey, "scatter, raiu." 
 QuLuQQ/Desr QudjQ^ssr QuujQeueisr Quiutu 
 pey-gir-en pey-d-en pey-v-en pey-y-a^ 
 
 20. Root: eaeu vai, "abuse." 
 
 sOiouQQpear e6)eu(v^<osr <5o<sij(D(SU(ssr eoeuiu 
 
 vai-gir-en vai-d-en vai-v-en vai-y-a 
 
 * Except in the past tense and in the imperative, these two verbs? 
 add the conjugational terminations regularly to ^((5 taru and a; (75, 
 varu. 
 
 Tamil Grammar S.-T. K 
 
^ 
 
 VERBS. 
 
 21. Eoot; QufT(^poru,"&ght" 
 
 QunQ^SlQ/D^ QufT<T^Q^ssr Q u fr (fi^Q eu sir 
 
 j>oru-gir-en poru-d-en poru-v-en 
 
 22. Root: ©^/r(ip ^om, " worship." 
 G)^rr(LpQQpeor Q^ir(LpQ<sesr Gl ^ rr (i^Co en 
 toru-gir-en toru-d-en toru-v-en 
 
 23. Eoot : SKsisr en, " say." 
 crmQQpssr isi&srQpsk (sreisrQusQr 
 
 G)U!rjr 
 por-a 
 
 tor-a 
 
 en-r-enr 
 
 en-h-en 
 
 sresr en-a, 
 or (oTskissr 
 en-n-a 
 
 tin-ga, or 
 tin-n-a 
 
 en-gir-en 
 
 24. ^cw- tin (or ^sk^a timu), "eat." 
 
 iin-gir-en, or tin-r-en* tin-b-en 
 
 tinnu-gir-en 
 
 25. Root : s-der un (or &.sm^i} unnu), " eat." 
 
 ^smQQrosk ^smQi—'sk 9-SssrQueor ^ssGrssor 
 
 un-gir-en un-d-enf un-b-en un-n-a,QX 
 
 s.6Qsrs un-ga 
 
 26. Root: siYsm- hdn (or ssssr lean), " see." 
 tEBrr^QQpssr <£E53crCoL_s3r <£Bfrsm-CoUiosr -srrstssr 
 Jcdn-gir-en han-d-enf hdn-b-en hdn-a 
 
 27. Root: 0GO nil (or 0eo&ju nillu), "stand, stay." 
 
 ^pQQp'sk fiskQrossr jBpQushr i§fl)<ss 
 
 nit-hir-i'nX, or nin-r-en^ nit-p-en\\ nit-Jca 
 
 nillu-gir-en (nillu-v-en) 
 
 28. Root: 0<F6u ^Z (or Q^eo^ Qellu), "go, pass." 
 
 (^ellu-gir-erif or ?ew-r-ew§ qellu-v-en QeUl-a 
 
 r^el-gir-en 
 
 29. Root: g)<s6u igal (or ^s^ igalu), "hate, oppose." 
 
 igan-r-en § igalu-v-en igal-a 
 
 igalu-gir-en 
 
 ^+t=nr (pronounced nd/r) . 
 
 t n+t=nd. X l+Tc=Pi 
 
VERBS. 51 
 
 30. Root: «6u Teal, "learn." 
 
 hit-Jcir-en* Jcat-t-en\ hat-p-mX hat-Tea 
 
 31. Root; ^(sir dj (or ^(cr^ dlu), "rule." 
 
 ^^SlQrceiir ^^sogtQu.(^ ^'^Qsuesr ,M<Bfr 
 
 dlu-gir-en dn-d-en^ dlu-v-en dUa 
 
 32. Root: Q<s,[Tm hoi (or QstKBn^ hollu), "take, contain." 
 
 hollu-gir-cn hon-d-en^ hollu-v-en hol-Ua 
 
 33. Root: (?«CTr A;e7, "listen, ask." 
 
 Q<SLL^Qn)m (odBLLQi^ek QstlQuesr Q,slL<sb ■ 
 
 Jcet-hir-en\\ ke(-t-en § het-p-en^ het-ha 
 
 34. Root: ^ik}(^ tungUy "sleep." 
 
 ^^iki(^^(Bro&T ^ikiQ^ssr^ ^jii's}'^Qeu<asr ^ihs 
 tungu-gir-en tung'-in-en tuiigu-v-en tung^-a 
 
 35. Root: (oT(L^^ erudu, "write." 
 
 <oT(Lp^lSlQrDSBr <SJ(ip^(v66rsi{r (oT(Lpj^QlSlJ6Sr ^(Lp^ 
 
 ^rudu-gir-en erud'-in-en erudu-v-en erud^-a 
 
 36. Root: G<^jv;^^ qeluttu (causative of ^eZ, no. 28), 
 "cause to go, expend." 
 
 {-eluttu-gir-en qelutV-in-en qeluttu-v-en relutf-a 
 
 37. Root: Quit po (or Quitil^ poyu, or Qu[r(^pdgu), "go." 
 QuirSlQrossr QuituSCdSSTsst QuffCoGusir (oUfr<S5 
 po-gir-en poy-in-en, or po-v-en, or pog-a 
 
 QuirQeGTssr CouiT(^^6iJssr 
 
 po-n-en** pogu-v-en 
 
 38. G<Fn-6u qol (or Qs^sreo^i qollu), "speak." 
 
 0<&=iTevsyiQQrD(Ssr Q<ff=tTssrQssresr Q<3=iTeu^(oeusir Q<fiT&oeo 
 rollu-gir-en (^onnetj (for r^ollu-v-en qoll-a 
 
 Qoll-in-en) 
 
 * l-\-]c = tk. t l-^t = tt (see para. 12, viii.). J l'\-p = tp. 
 
 I l+t=nd or tt. \\ l+k=tk. ^ l-\-2^ = tp. 
 
 ** The contracted form in common use. Cf. root ^ d (or ^(^ 
 dgu, ^(L/ dyu), "become," d-gil-en or dgu-gir-en, d-n-en or dy-in-en, 
 •di'-en, dg-a. 
 
VKRBS. 
 
 [N.B. — Polysyllabic roots ending in*-?*, and also dissyllabic 
 roots of which the first syllable is long, as Qlis^ peru^ 
 "speak," <^-.rilQkattu," show,'' ^iKDliattu* '' i\Q,'' u sm ^}} 
 pnnnu* " make," follow more or less the conjugation of 
 nos.' 34-38.] 
 
 29. As mentioned before (§ 27), the strong middle in- 
 crements or tense-signs Ichir, tt, and pp are used as a rule 
 by transitive or causative verbs, and the weak forms, gir, dr 
 &.Q., by intransitive verbs. Hence, the same root may some- 
 times take both the forms, with transitive and intransitive 
 siguifications ; e.g. 
 
 Root. 
 
 Present. 
 
 Past. 
 
 Future. 
 
 Infinitive. 
 
 
 f Qlo ' ■ &;D^:51 
 
 (oLDium^^ 
 
 Qli^[L\lc, 
 
 Qlblu 
 
 (dLCHU 
 
 \ mey-gir-adu mey-nd-adu 
 J (the cow) grazes 
 
 mey-um 
 
 mey -a 
 
 mey 
 
 ] (ou^' <k£i\vrosk 
 
 (oLnCu^Q^esT 
 
 (oLniL'LjQuidr 
 
 QiDLU-S^ff 
 
 
 1 mey-hh'tr-en 
 M feed (cattle) 
 
 mey -it-en 
 
 mey-pp-en 
 
 mey-kka 
 
 
 r ^^ s'QlrDsk 
 
 ^sGi^^QjStsk 
 
 ^66)<6=Q(SlJsir 
 
 jtimy-B'uu 
 
 ^SO)^ 
 
 \ aQcii-g'ir-tn 
 J 1 trem ble 
 
 ardi-nd-en 
 
 aqdi-v-en 
 
 ardi-y-a 
 
 ardi 
 
 1 ^oe'¥^QQrosor 
 
 ^S6)S=^Q<sdr 
 
 ^^rg^uQusisi 
 
 ^SO)<F«'?^ 
 
 
 1 aQCb'i-hkir-en 
 ^ I shake 
 
 ac.di-tt-en 
 
 ardi-pp-en 
 
 a(;di-kka- 
 
 vir 
 or 
 
 r ■^i^hQfo&sr 
 
 <sSi^^Q^esr 
 
 (^(L^Qqjsot 
 
 <a?Lp 
 
 \ vir-qir-en 
 1 1 fall" 
 
 vir-nd-en 
 
 viru-v-en 
 
 vir-a 
 
 (^i^^Q^ek 
 
 (sStpuQuiosr 
 
 (^y-rs^ 
 
 vJru 
 
 1 vlr-kh r-en 
 ^ I cause to fall 
 
 vlr-tt-en 
 
 vir-pp-en 
 
 vlr-kka 
 
 
 /■ s}9 $1 Ql /D ^ 
 
 ■s^ilQu-esr 
 
 ■s3(S)Q<suek 
 
 sSu. 
 
 nSi® 
 
 I viduglr-en 
 ] I leave 
 
 vit-t-enf 
 
 vidu-v-en 
 
 vid-a 
 
 vidu 
 
 1 shlGi-^QC^/o^ 
 
 shiQ^Q^ek 
 
 s£l®uQusir 
 
 £)9®^& 
 
 
 1 v'du-hMr-en 
 VI dismiss 
 
 vidu-tt-en 
 
 vidu-pp-en 
 
 vidu-kka 
 
 * The first syllable is " long by position." 
 
 t Cf. § 27, exc. a. 
 
VERBS. 63 
 
 Q<sQQ(ofr)esr Q<slL(ol^^ Ql^QQsvsk Q'Sl, 
 kef/u-glr-Sn ket-t-en Jctdu-v-en ked-a 
 
 Qs>Q J I perish 
 
 kedu-kkir-Bn kedu-lt-en kedu-pp-en kedu-kka 
 
 I destroy 
 
 See also Causative Verbs, para. 49. 
 
 30. From all the foregoing examples it is evident that, in 
 conjugating a verb, the learner has tirst to find out the root, 
 and then the particular middle increment which it takes in 
 the present, past, and future tenses. A thorough mastery of 
 the rnles and explanations given above will make this com- 
 paratively easy. In case of doubt it is always best to consult 
 the dictionary.* 
 
 Participles. 
 
 31. Participles are of two kinds, Eelative and Adverbial. 
 
 i. The Utlat.ve Participle ( nuiuQos=iFLh peyar-eccam) is a 
 w rhal adjective ivith an affirmative or negative signification^ 
 Maiulivg in attributive relation to the noun ivhicli follows it. 
 
 In the Affirmative, its present and ])ast forms are obtained 
 by tlroppiiijj: tlie personal endings of the present and past 
 tenses, and adding a to the conjugational base. 
 
 Thus, f^(b)^\viv^ Odiigir-en," L run," gives <^(BSifD udugir'ay 
 ^'running," and g^'^GsorscJr Odin-en, "I ran," ge^Lsor ddin-a, 
 ■"run"; .^^^iCo/Dsa/ (Igir-en, ''I become," ^Qp dgir-a, "be- 
 coming," and r^Qccr<^ dn-en or ^uS^ssrdr dy-in-en, "I 
 bec:inie," ^/,=^ dn-a or ^g,tiS/sor dyin-a. 
 
 Hence, ^©^/y (yF^wir.ir ndugira kudirdi=*^ a running horse " 
 {i.e. a horse that runs, or is running), and fjif ssr (^^eoir 
 ddina ku(iir(iiz='' n horse that ran." 
 
 The Future form is the same as the third person neuter of 
 the future tense ( 'i4. c). Thus, r^^^&c^u- gp^oD hudirdi ddum-= 
 "the horse will run," whilst ^®lo (^^stm^i Odum kudirdi= 
 '"the horse that will run " (or, that runs as matter of habit). 
 
 The Negative Relative Participle for all tenses is obtained 
 by adding ^^ dda or simply ^ a (chiefly in poetry) to the 
 
 * For a classification of Tamil verbs, see paragraphs 55 to 70 of 
 Dr. Pope's '* Handbook of the Ordinary Dialect of the Tamil Lan- 
 guage," Oxford, 1904. 
 
64 VEKBS. 
 
 root, with due observation of euphonic rules; as, odu+dda 
 (or a)-=^jL—iT^ ofdda or ^l—it od'd and <s^i—rT(^) (^^!<5orr od'dda 
 (or od'd') Jcudirdi=" a. horse that did not, does not, 07^ will not 
 run." So, gey C' do ") + dda or d=Q<3'iijiun-^s qey-y-dda or 
 O'ff'iiujn gey-y-d, and ^<oG)^<3'Q<FUjaj(r^ La(SGBs^ssr adai-C'Cey' 
 ydda manidan=^** a man who did not (does or will not) do it." 
 Although this participle qualifies nouns of any gender, 
 number, or case (just like an English adjective) without itself 
 undergoing any change, yet when it is formed from a transi- 
 tive verb it has its usual governing power ; e.g. 
 
 ^[T<ck ^iLis^e^ (^S'!<o5)ir ndn ottina Icudirdi, "ahorse that I 
 drove" (lit. I-driven horse), and r^^:<5B)ir(56)iu (S^iLuf-esr jsam- 
 kudirdiydi ottina ndn, * I who drove a horse." Ottina is 
 the causative form of odina, both from root odu (see 
 para. 49). 
 er^^ s.u5(5roiru-/LD (o)<Bn-<5V6vfr^ e^(T^ <F^0ujfT^ enda uyirdi- 
 y-um Tcolldda oru ganniydgi, " an ascetic who does (did or 
 will) not kill any life whatever." Here uyirdi is in the 
 accusative case governed by holldda. 
 
 ii. The Adverbial Participle or Gerund (sj9§s5r OT<F<Fti 
 vindi-eccam) also has affirmative and negative forms. 
 
 A. The Affirmative is obtained in two ways : — 
 
 (a) Those verbs which take ©esr in as their middle particle 
 of the past simply drop the final n of the conjugational base. 
 Thus, from u^&sofiesr pann-in, the conjugational stem of the 
 past tense pannin-en, "I made," we get the gerund Ui5m(o5i^ 
 panni, " having made," by dropping the final n. So, in the 
 word (5T(Lp^iQs^ sk erudin-en, '* 1 wrote," the conjugational base 
 is sr(Lp^§esr erudin, and the gerund is therefore stq^^ erudif 
 "having written." 
 
 (h) All other verbs add ^ w to the conjugational base of 
 the past tense. Thus, urriir^^ pdrtt is the conjugational base 
 of uirh^Q^viv pdrtt-en, "I saw "; add 2_ t^ to it, and you get 
 the gerund urrrr^^ pdrtt-u, "having seen." So, Q<flu^ 
 geyd-u, "having done," from Q^FiuQ^esr Qeyd-en-, @0^^ 
 irund-u, "having remained," from §)Q^^Q^ek irund-en; 
 <oT6sr^ enr-u, " having said," from (sr^Qpssr enr-en. 
 
 B. The Negative Adverbial Participle is obtained by the 
 addition of ddu or dmal to the root. One of the forms is, 
 
VERBS. 6& 
 
 therefore, the same as the third person sincrular neuter of the 
 negative verb. Thus, from root i^s^sS hull, "to bathe," are 
 obtained (^sii^uj(T^ kuli-y-ddu and r.^sft\iuiTLnGo Jculi-y-clrnal,. 
 " not bathing." 
 
 c. As the gerund is only an adverbial extension of the predi- 
 cate, it requires a finite verb to complete the sentence ; e.g. 
 ^suo^ 01— js^ <SL'^;^iTsm avail nadandu vanddn, "he came- 
 walking " (lit. he having walked, came). 
 
 QeoT'ok nan vi(tuk]ai vandu, tdydrdl-k-krndu, a-c-cangadi* 
 Qomjrfi, " I came h^^me, saw the mother, and told her that 
 matter " (lit. 1 to the house having come, the mother 
 having seen, that matter related) 
 
 Thus, in translating into Tamil, whenever a subject has two 
 or more verbs, it is best to render all of them except the last 
 by the gerund. The Tamil language recognizes only one finite 
 verb in a sentence, simple or compound. 
 
 Verbal ant) Abstract Nouns. 
 
 32. Participial Nouns. —By the addition of the personal 
 terminations of the third person, an, al, du for the singular^ 
 and ar or argal, viii (avdi) or vdigal or a for the plural (§ 23, 6), 
 to the present, past, and negative relative ])articiples, a large- 
 number of participial nouns in frequent use are formed. Thus, 
 from the relative participles of kuH (namely rs^sS^Qfo kulik- 
 hira, (^6i9t^^ kulitta, and @«Yf)uj.r^ kuliydda) are obtained : — 
 
 Present. 
 
 Masc.(^sYft«@/r)siys(ir he who ^ c§<s^^Sp<siJiT \ 
 
 kulikkira-vf-an bathes \ kulikkira-vf-ar ( "^Y 
 
 *^ o • o • • r wno 
 
 Fem. (^^^sQ;D<su<s(r she who J (§3tfl-s<sirDsnfrs;£iT V j^^^j^^ 
 
 kulikkira-vf-al bathes V kulikkira-vf -argal J 
 Neut.(-^sTB^&/9^ that which r.g-^sS^i9(Do6)ai(<ss(T) those 
 kulikkira-duX bathes, -r kulikkira-vdi or which 
 
 the bathing -vdigal bathe 
 
 » For accavgadi-y-di ; the accusative case-ending of neuter nouns is, 
 as a rule,, not expressed, 
 t u is a euphonic insertion. 
 X This is the same as the 3rd sing. neut. indie, present. 
 
^ 
 
 VERBS. 
 
 Past. 
 
 hulitti(-v*'an 
 
 Pern. 
 
 kiiUtta-v*-al 
 
 kulUta-duf 
 
 Masc. 
 
 Jcvlhj'di/a-v-an 
 
 Fein., ('^'■oifi I- iTs^su&r 
 kul'njdda-v-al 
 
 Neut. {^isrtlMjif^^ 
 Jcullycida-du 
 
 he who 
 bathed 
 
 she who 
 bathed 
 
 that which 
 bathed, or 
 the having 
 bathed 
 
 Negative. 
 he who does (did, 
 &c.) not bathe 
 
 she who does (did, 
 &c.) not bathe 
 
 kulitta-v*-ar 
 
 kulittor (contracted 
 form) 
 
 (^ Srfi^^ 6ro (SU ( « (of ' ) 
 
 kulitta-vili or 
 ■vdigal 
 
 ((^ &(fi^^ SOT 
 kuldia-n-aX 
 
 thev 
 who 
 bathed 
 
 those 
 which 
 bathed 
 
 \ kuliydda-v-ar 
 \kulii 
 
 'i/dda-v-argai 
 thatwhich dof^s (did, r^srfliufr^so(S}j(<se(T) 
 &G.) not bathe, or kuliydda-vdi or 
 the non-bathing -vdigal 
 
 33. Participial Nouns of the Future tense are obtained by 
 "the addition of the same personal terminations of the third 
 person to a ])artidpial adjective of the future tense (not in 
 use), fonned like the nd. | art. of the ] -resent and past by 
 affixing a to the conjugational base of the future tense, lj _p 
 being substituted for tinal (sn v of iho weak base, except in the 
 neuter singular. Thus, tlie conjugational base of (^srf'.uQusisr 
 kulippm, " I shall bathe," is kullpp- (see above, para. 24, c.) ; 
 those or ^gstQu^ tinben, " 1 shall eat," and Qi<3'Ci.jQ(aijm reyven, 
 "* I shall do," are ^ivwu tinb- and Qr^iueu (;eyv-. By adding a 
 and substituting p for v, we get the future participial forms 
 (not in use) (^sifluu kullpp-a, ^sau tinh-a, and Q<3=l'uu ceyb-a 
 -or Qs'iueij <ieyv-a. From these, by ihe further addition of 
 personal endings, we o' tain the following participial nouns 
 -with a future signification : — 
 
 @orf)LJu<a/£<Jr kulippa-r-an he who will bathe 
 
 (^srf^uueijek kullppa-v-al she who will bathe 
 
 @(Sffluu^ kuUppa-du that which will bathe 
 
 * V is a euphonic insertion. 
 
 f Same as the 3rd sing. neut. indie, past. 
 
 J ^ is a euphonic insertion. 
 
VERBS. 57 
 
 ^sffluu^'(T(^f^) hul'ppa-v-ar{gal) thej who will bathe 
 (§sif\uu£S)Si.{^<m) kuHppi-vai(gal) ihose which will bathe 
 ^ssruisusk tinha-v-an Q^tiuiaKsifr re ,ba-v-an 
 
 (he who \ville:it) * (he wbo will do) 
 
 ^musLQ^T tlnba-v-al Q'd^iiusu&r Qyyha-v-al 
 
 '^ohu^ t',nha-du Q ^Tii^j^ Qei/Vd-du 
 
 sin U(SU!r(^ .r,v ) tinba-var(gal) Q .^f ij u £ij I'r (<3i nii) ce>/ha-var(gal) 
 ^::-(n uss)sij(^h nil) flnba-v<i'(gal) 0-€=LuUnS)5u(s&r) Qeyba-vdi(gal) 
 
 34. All these p irti- ipial noun< usually take a subject, and hn ve 
 ihe same j^'overuin;^ power a-^ the verbs from which they are 
 derived. They are, moreover, declined like any other noun; e.g. 
 
 ^eu'^ ■i'rJd>rsoi fjOQ^cor ^suaor avandi-k-honravan iwaw, " this 
 
 is he that killed him." 
 ^<oG)^<ff-Q<8'iL<dij,^ ,ff&iuj&jf^ addi'C'Ceyradu Qari-y-alla, "it is 
 
 not proper to do that " (lit. the dumg that iti a future 
 
 time is not proper). 
 
 kdran po'j ronnavaldi-t-tanditldn, " the jud'je punished the 
 Avoman who spoke the untruth " (ronnavaldi, ace). 
 
 35. Annther rl.ss of verbal nonns is formed by adding 
 ^ro^ kdi (pronounced gdl), ^lev al {^w taJ, ^sv kal, and 'Sj/^ov 
 Jcudal) to the roots ot verbs which take the middle increment 
 Qjoi kirn (i.e. giru) in the present, and <f5(^« kkdi, ^J'&o ttal, 
 <k<Boeo kkal, -^-^d-eo kkudal to 1 hnse which take -iB'^j}! kkiru. 
 They express t lie act or its results, and have in son:ie instances 
 the same governing power as participial nouns. That in kdi 
 is frequently used in the locative case to signify an adveibial 
 clause of time; e.g. 
 
 addi (attain to) +H? = c^ot)/_6d:c5 addigdi, "attainment." 
 pndii (lie down) -\- kkdi = u®^so<s padukkdi, "the lying 
 
 prostrate," "a bed or litter." 
 varu (come) -{■al=wu-6v varal, "a coming." 
 pcru (lalk) + tal—Qu<(jr^eo peqiidal, "a speaking or speech." 
 *a (become) +A:<ii = _^ 450)^ dgdi, "becoming." 
 „ „ -\-kal=^'Sffo dgal. 
 
 „ „ -{-kudal=^^S.^*'^ dgudal. 
 
 * Probably ^(§ dgu was the base, and the suffixes are at, al, and 
 tal, the finafu of the base being dropped before a vowel. Cf. Qu.i^mcS 
 pogai, (^Ljn-^eb pogal, (SuiT(^fiso pogudal, from root po {pog»t), "go." 
 The verbal noun Quir^eo podal is from root podu, "be sufficient." 
 
68 VERBS. 
 
 padi (re?id) -\- ttal=uis;L^^6v ;paditfal, ** reading, learning." 
 
 edu (take) -|-^-^'a7=sT©«<«6u edukkal. 
 
 jBfTssr 2./Q<5SsY/ «(5;i_LjL9©scDc5(i96l) 71 dn uiigaldi-Jc-Jcu]jpidv^diyil 
 
 (locative), " while I was calling you." 
 jsirm L^(5{u^'6s^o6)^uui^^^<si) f5&osv^ nan pustagattdi-p^ 
 
 padittal nalladu, ** my (lit. I) reading the book is good." 
 
 36. Verbal nouns expressing only the abstract idea, and 
 with no governing power, are also formed by the conversion 
 of verbal roots into nouns, with or without modification, and 
 the addition of such terminations as di, am, vi, vdi, u, vu, hu^ 
 pu, ti or di, gi, &c. ; e.g. ^q^iL® runUtu, " a rolling up, cigar "; 
 <3?p^ QUttu, " circuit "; dh-jb^j JcuUu, " proclamation " (from 
 root d^^i); cSi-cFcF/i Jcuccam, "shyness" (from rt. <5f._<gF); Q^® 
 Tcedu or (?<»© Tcedu, " ruin" (fr. Q&®) ; (5T(Lp^^ eruttu, "writing,, 
 letter" (ir.tor(Lp^i); ^(SOL-uddi, "garment" (I'r.s.©); QtEn^<BLa 
 nokkam, "look, view" (fr. G°^/r^(^) ; Q^pyroLo tettam, "assur- 
 ance " (fr. Q^^); Q<£B(shsS kelvi, "hearing, question " (fr. 
 (o<S(ofr); ^iT€6)su Urvdi, "decision, toll " (fr. ^/f) ; ^)p(si] tirdvu 
 or ^^fouL^ tirappu, " opening " (fr. s'lro) ; /«@ nlkku or 0&<sLn 
 nikkam, " separation " (fr. /) ; Ql^<si^ kirivu, "a rent or tear" 
 (fr. ^ifi); jbiLl] natpu, "friendship" (fr. ^^efr); Qenn^uL^ ve- 
 rippu, "drunkenness" (fr. ©(Siy/35,'); Qs^iflui^ ierippu, '^ miorm- 
 ing, communication" (fr. Qs^rf}) ; ^®^ vidudi, "leave" (fr. 
 6£t®) ; Q<s®^ kedudi, "loss (ir. Q<s®)', Q ^fr i-.fr <fB todarcci 
 or Q^fTL-iTL^ todarbu, "pursuit" (fr. Q^fri—ir); s.(Sssrir<F^ 
 unarcci, "consciousness" (fr. ©.CTsr/f). 
 
 37. The suffix mdi (see para. 18, a), which is more or less 
 restricted to classical Tamil, is added to the relative participle 
 (present, past, future, or negative) to form verbal nouns ; as, 
 (^eff)-sS(sisrfD<3S)Lc> kulikkinra-mdi, ^' the hsithmg*^; r^<si^^^'SQu:i 
 kul'tta-mdl, "the having bathed"; r^srfluu(oSiLn kulippa-mdiy 
 "the (future) bathing " (see para. 33) ; and c^sif^iuireoLn kuliyd- 
 mdi, "the not bathing." So, Q^CuQskp^s^uh geyginra-mdi, 
 "the doing"; G)<g=(Zj#srom geyda-mdi, Q<3'LLJU6S)Ln geyha-mdi, 
 and (o)<g=Luujn'€iDLD geyyd-mdi. 
 
 Infinitive Mood. 
 
 38. There is yet another class of verbal nouns of frequent 
 ocurreiice, which in some respects answers to the English 
 infinitive mood. To fonn them, you add «« kka to the roots 
 
VERBS. 59 
 
 of those verbs which take rkQ^j Jckiru in the j^resent, and ^ a 
 (lu ya or <su vn) to the roots which take &ijrL Uru (giru) ; as^ 
 (B)srf^4.<s5 kidi-kka, "to bathe," from @srfl«9(?/r)oJr hulihlclrcn; 
 Q-B^LULu (-ey-y-a, "to do," from Qis^CuQQrossr (;eygiren. (See 
 para. 28 for other examples.) A few weak roots take « ka 
 instead of simply ^a; as, G'.^.il* ketka/*to\\Q\r'' (C?^(oiT + <£5); 
 jElrD.i£ nithi, ''to i^tand" {^eo + s,); &n)<s katka, "to learn" 
 (i56u-|-«). Compaie para. 24, c, note. This infinitive, being 
 itself a verbal noun, has the governing power of one in du, 
 such as Qs^'i k'lnojj. rei/glradu or G)^(L(ffi.'^j reyvadu (§ 34). Its 
 use may be understood from the following exiinples : — 
 
 jS ^sS-*£ds Qeu.^&Lo nl hulikka vendum, "you must bathe'' 
 (lir. you to bathe is necessary). Here ni is the subject 
 of kullkka, which itself is the subject of vendum. 
 iSiTscT ^ois)^s=Q<ff=iuuj Qsussar^LD nan addi(c)ceyya vendum, 
 "I must do that " (lit. I to do that is necessary). Nd7i 
 is t^he subject and addi the object of (leijya. 
 ^(SiJ)^<#0<j=(L'Uj G'aj«OTr®Lb addi(c)ceyya vendum, "that must 
 
 be done " (lit. to do that is necessary). 
 ^su&r (^m^^CSev @«rf?«<5LJ(2'Lj/7@)6fr aval kujattil-e kulik- 
 
 ka-p-pfmal, " she went to bathe in the tank." 
 ersk ^^LDiSliooiLi eu w •s'Q 'ff n GO ^] en tamhiydi vara'C-coUu,''t^H 
 
 my (younger) brother to come." 
 ^Q^eusi-T ^L-, (o^(iT)<su<sir u rr (hi S (frf' est oruvan a da, oruvan pddu- 
 
 girdn, "while one dances, the other sings." 
 L£>6U)Lp QuiuLu<k(^<3(rLC) ^oorpiLju:! mavdi ptyya-k-kulam ni' 
 
 rdiyum. "if rain fall, the tank will be tilled." 
 (oT66r<s>(§uu€sm^ ^]T(SijLo emkku-p-panan tara-v-um, " (please) 
 give me money." * 
 
 Imperative Mood. 
 
 39. The simple root or the crude base of a Tamil verb is its 
 2nd person singular imperative; as, @syfi kuli, "bathe!" 
 jFL- nada, " h alk ! " ^^ tin, " f^at ! " Qssk kel, " hsten or 
 ask!" *€ij;r m, "come!" ^^/r fa, " give ! " Gun- _?>d, " go ! " 
 
 The 2nd person plural is obtained by the addition of 2.m 
 nm or ^m&m ungal to the singular; as, f5u.<si\LD nada-v-um, 
 ^KL_ffl^s/.«<STr nada-v-ungal ; fi^-^si^^ih tin-n-um, ^ekj^ihsm 
 ti/jnungal; Q<sm)LDkel-um,Q&(^i5i<sm kelungal; Q.'iT((hLcvdr-um, 
 ^ii!'(^it<S(Sfrvdrungal-, ^[tq^lo tdr-um, ^iT(T^fE}<s&: id, ungal {ihese 
 
^ VERBS. 
 
 two v<^rbs are irregular ; see p. 49, note) ; Quit^ld pog-um 
 (usually contracted to (ouirth pom), Quirw^sm ■poiigal. Both 
 these forms are used honorifically for ihe singular; the form in 
 nhgal is used when you wish to be extra polite. A polite impera- 
 tive is also formed by the addition of um to the uifinitive ; as, 
 ui^'Sssi^ih padilvka-v-um, " please read." In poetry, the plural 
 terminations are ir, ~ir, and 7nin ; as, QurS^i't pO-d-ir, /Fi—uS'iGer 
 nnda-min, (£ <s ^ li9 (S^ it keti-mtn-Jr {hil+min^cenmin). 
 
 40. The negative imperative, or ** prohibitive," is formed by 
 the addition of the particle of t^mphasis, e, to th*' 3rd sinoular 
 neuter of the negative verb (i.e. in other words, by adding 
 Cide, ddeyum, and ddCyuiigal to the root). Thus, from vara (hi, 
 "it comes not," are formed — 
 
 Sing. eurrirQ^ var-dde, "don't come." 
 
 Plur. <su]T(T(o^[L\Ln var-dde-y-um, " don't jeconie'^ (or "don't 
 come, sir "). 
 (Su]T'.TQ^vL\ik}&&T var-dde-y-uiigal, „ „ (or " please, 
 sir, don't come "). 
 Similarly, 
 
 QuiT<sn(D^ pog-dde, " don't go." 
 QufraEn-Q^iLjLc pogddeyum, "don't go, sir." 
 Qu!T<3i(TQ^[Uik&>£ir pdgddeyuiigal, "(I pray you, sir) do 
 
 not go." 
 f^<oSuu'r(r^ hull-y-dde, "don't bathe"; also r^(sS<s<3i(TQ^ 
 
 kulikkdde (with increment kku). 
 ^L-Qj/rO?,^ nada-v-dde, and fFi—s<asn(c^ nadakkdde, "don't 
 walk." 
 
 In high Tamil the suffixes al and el for the singular, and 
 'Onmin (i.e. al + min) for the plural, are added to the root; as, 
 !5t—<su(r\' nada-v-al or jst—Qeu&j nada-v-el, "walk not!" y^t— 
 Sijsiru9dr nada-v-anmin, "walk ye not!" Q<9=iL'UJsii uQsk c^ey- 
 y-anmin, " do ye not ! " 
 
 Potential, Optative, and Desidekativb Verbal Forms. 
 
 41. A verbal form answering to the Englisli potential mood 
 is obtained by the addition of ^®Lh kudum h> the infinitive, 
 -or eg^'.D dm to the verbal noun in al or kkal dmra. 35). Kudum 
 is the 3rd person neut. future of ktldu, "join with, be fit," 
 here signifying "ability " or "possibility."' Am is evidently 
 a contraction of dgum, the 3rd person neut. future of a, " to 
 
VERBS. er 
 
 become " (pp. 43, and 51 note), implying here the idea of " per- 
 mission." Thus : — 
 
 jEiTsisT (^ffff^^is^Bi^CBih nan Jculikka-Jc-Jciidum, ** I can bathe " 
 
 (lit. I to batlie will be possible). A'an is the subject of 
 
 hulilcka, which, being a veibal noun, is the sul.jeut of 
 
 hudum. See jibov»', para. 38. 
 eouuj'o^ji^^o^SQs'iL uja<5fi-®/Q paiyatj nddi-c-ceyya-h-hudum, 
 
 *' the boy can do that " (lit. the boy to do ihat will be 
 
 possible). ^ (suiTB-5<s^c3^&LDij n'l vdrihJca-Ji-Jcudum-d," cslii 
 
 you read ?" 
 ^Q-ieir j5t-'Stf-S'ji^QLh (St &st rn? sr^r aval nadahka-lc-hddum enrdn,. 
 
 " he said that she could walk." 
 ^ iiiw ^^jrtnSl Jov (^ siB i <3' ov IT ih ndTi dff'ihj kill kkal-dm. "I may 
 
 bathe in tlie river." Here ndn is the subject of kulikkal,. 
 
 which is itself the subject of dm. Attll is the loc. of ^^^g^ 
 
 dru, " river," and e, the enclitic particle of emphasis. 
 ^■svoSTfiG)^ ^Q-^i'ljuj(svii ix> avtin addi-n-ceyyal-dm, " he may do 
 
 that " (lit. he doing that will become). 
 j^iTsk Quii<{BriV!TLc> STssr(Tr/>m nan pogal-dm enrdn, *' he said 
 
 that I might go." 
 Tl)e ne^L^ative of kudum is sk-i—fr^ kudddu (of. para. 24, d);. 
 that uf dgiini or dm is r^sir^ dgddu. 
 
 ^jra '^T^ ^^.^pcSlGo (^sSk^-kai^-i—iT^ ndn inda dttil kulikka- 
 
 k-kfidddu, " I cannot bathe in this river "; but inda dttil 
 
 kullkka-k-kudddu, — *' it is not possible to bathe in this 
 
 river." 
 ji ^Csuu^<pQs'iTGo^:^<so ^b^t^ ni appadi-c-colludal dr/d. lU, 
 
 •* it is not proper for you to say so " (lit. you saying in 
 
 that manner is not becoming). 
 ^^Il'u Li;L:^^c-^iT^^.^'iG<Sir &Tmev^'£5[r^rrniippadi-c-certtu-k-- 
 
 koUal djddd, ''ought you not to have saved up (money) 
 
 in this way ? " Here knUal is the subject of dgddd, and 
 
 nl that of rertttikkollal. 
 
 42. Optative or Desiderative verbal forms can be obtained 
 by the addition of — 
 
 (a) 'Ihe enclitic « ka to the root of a verb. This form 
 occurs chiefly in poetry, and is the same for all numbers and 
 persons; e.g. 
 
 jFjzk uu^-ioB ndn padi-k-ka, " let me read." 
 
 //f jSjb<s nlr nit-ka (nil+ka), "may you remain." 
 
63 VERBS. 
 
 {h) ^<s dga (pronounced more like aha) to the future 
 tense ; as, 
 
 (SjioSuQ'uGw JcuhppJn, " I shall bathe"; (ff^^^uQu.^ts kulip- 
 
 pendga, "may I bathe ! " " I desire to bathe ! " 
 u fT Q <su ir-dr pdduvdl, " she will sing"; un Qsun mii <s pdduvdl- 
 
 dga, *' may she sing ! " 
 ^.5Yf)LJu^/r<5 Icullppaddga, ''may it bathe! " 
 [N.B.— In forming the neuter optative, dga is added to the 
 neuter participial noun of the future tense, instead of to 
 the 3rd person neuter future of the verb. Cf. para. 33.] 
 
 (c) The conjugated forms of the defective verb «i_ hada, 
 '' ought," to the infinitive ; as, 
 
 / (^sSiD^'fE-^i—<sniTCu m ktilihka-h-kadavd'j, ''you ought or 
 
 must bathe." 
 j^605;^<FG<fF(Laj-«<55/_©;j^ addi-r-ceyya-k-kadavadic, "let that 
 
 be done " (lit. to do that is desirable). 
 ^ji' ^L^iU'k<su.<SL>^ a hi ariya-k-kadavadu, " let it perish." 
 
 (d) lIQld ttum (probably for ep l©/i ottum), &./i um, and 
 G(a/s5OT®LD vendum to the infinitive; as, 
 
 j5iT^ (^sif^s<sBLL®Lc> ndyi kuUkka-ttiim, "let me bathe." 
 
 ^(suesr Qu[T<SLL®Lh avan pOga-ttum, "let him go." 
 
 ^ffljssr (auir(ajii avan vara-v-um, "let biiii come" (polite 
 
 imper., § 39). 
 f5!T<ok f5i—s,'B Q(SiJ6m®Lc> ndii nadakka vcndum, "Imust walk." 
 
 Verbal Forms signifying Condition and Concession. 
 ("If," "although," &c.) 
 
 43. There are two ways of obtaining a Subjunctive or 
 Conditional form. The first is by adding ^60 dl to the con- 
 jugational base of the j'tist tense. It is of common occurrence, 
 and is the same for all numbers and persons ; as, 
 
 QuirQssTfok pOn-en, " I went "; Qu[j;^&o pi'm-dl, " If (I, vou, 
 
 &c.) go." 
 (^■sSk&i!i<5sr kulitt-dn, "he bathed"; @&?1^;Sitgo kulitt-dl, 
 
 " If (I, you, &c.) bathe." 
 
 The other form, chiefly occurring in poetry, is by affixing 
 il or in to the roots of verbs which take the middle increment 
 
VERBS. 63 
 
 liru {(jiru) in the present, and Jckil or Wn .to those taking 
 kJciru ; as, 
 
 LD<30)Lp Quiiii^Jeo mariii pey-y-il or QuCu^i^o'sr 'pey-y-in, " if it 
 rain." (OuiuS)/!)^^! pf'/Z-^iV-acZt*, ** it rains.") 
 
 fBirm (^srfisQev nan Jculi-kkll or r^srfl^iSo.v Jculi-JcJcin, "if I 
 bathe." {(^etBeQQro^ kuH-khir-en, "I bathe.") 
 
 44. ^Qev dgil (in poetry ^ti9sor dyin) and ^j,;^bv dndl, 
 subjunctives of a, " become," are used as " quasi-con junc- 
 tions"; e.g. 
 
 ^uuL^ ^(S^eu nppadi anal, " if (it be) so." 
 
 j^jsuir j^UfB'scr ^@)6l) avar arar.an dndl, "if he be the king." 
 
 In colloquial Tamil tiiese are often added to the future or 
 the past teuse of a Unite verb to express condition; as, 
 
 j^uQuiTQQji\v iidn inda-k-kulattil-e ku!lpiH~n-d//dl (or dgil) 
 irandu-p'pnvCn, " if I bathe in this tank I shall die off " 
 (lit. irandu, "having died." pdven, "I shall go"). So 
 also, @syfii5(2'^@)@)6u kulitten-dndl, "If I were to bathe, 
 or if I bathed." 
 
 Sometimes (jr e is added for the sake of emphasis ; as, ^avssr 
 €U(f^€u(T(oSffr ^(eo)6u avan vavuvdn-e dndl, "if he will (really) 
 come." 
 
 The Negative Cori'^itional clause is commonly expressed l>y 
 adding sbiilL-nev viftdl (the subjunctive oividu, "leave," § 29), 
 or <^((?)^^iTeo irnnddl (that of iru, "remain, exist"), or even 
 QuiK^Go pondl (subj. oi pd, "go"), to the negative gerund or 
 adverbial participle of the verb in question (para. 31, ii. b). 
 Thus :— 
 
 ^&STS(^,<S^(§(o(SlJZOr^ (LpL^tUirLDGO '^i (ff, ^ ^ IT &0 OV (LptU^lL'ir 
 
 sSiLLu.ir6v <FLhu<sfrLa tSiLi^uQushr nl inda vi^ldi ippoinidu 
 mudittdl nn Qamhalam unakku-t-taruven, mudi-y-dmal 
 inmddl or mudi-y-d vittdl camhalam pidippi^n, " if you 
 finish this work now I shali give you your pay, if you do 
 not finish it (lit. if you leave or remain without finishing 
 it) I shall stop the pay." So r^sifiujiTLan) Quu^^so kuli- 
 ydmat pondl, " if you do not bathe." 
 The negative gerund ^levevir ilia (i.e. illdmal), of root ^su 
 tZ, from which illdi (§25 and 47, g) is also formed, is often 
 
64 VERBS. 
 
 pretixetl to v'ttnl to express " i^" not" or "otherwise"; e.g. nJ 
 enfni'-h-kf'/ppidiiv'iy anal varaven, ilia v'lttdl viva vidtten, '* if 
 you will call me, I shall come; if m)t, I will not come " (§ 47,'?). 
 
 45. ST oil (fr 60 enrdl nn-l oTos^/c'j enil, subjunctives of otsst e«. 
 " say," are often used to express a reason ; e.g. 
 
 (5Tuuu^ (oJsotiov eppadl mil, *' if vou say * how.' " 
 (57537- <5Tssr(7rf6v en ejjrdl, " if you say ' why.' " 
 Both aie rendered in English by " for " or " because"; e.g. 
 
 (S7«W- S'lki^^' ^■S(Drr.S(§30^lti'ULr), (oTLJUtfL SToOf/fel), -SirevQuO, 
 
 ^^ (oTebsvifLn j;tjS)j0'Sc^dfQ'g=fT<ok(D&5ri>ifT eti caiigadi tu- 
 rdi/:ku-'-teriyum, eppadi end, hdlame aclti elldm avaruklm-c- 
 connen, " the gentleman know*! my aliair, because I told 
 him a'l about it this morning." 
 
 CT off? sr^uu^Qiuibi'S&iro^ ndn v7ttul-hu-c-curuJdd2j-p-puga 
 vendum, en enrdl enak'Jni-p-paQi-y-Lfhd'lnrdcu, " I must go- 
 home soon, for I am getting hungry." 
 
 46. By the addition of 2_ld uin to the, subjunctive explained 
 above, or to the gerund of a verb, an adverbial clause of con- 
 cession can be formed, with present or ])ast signitica'i n ; as, 
 
 (g)'off^sj^n(sv lulit dl (subjunctive of hult)-{-^in um = r^^^ 
 
 ^iT £y/n hujittdl-um, " a though (I, you, etc.) bathe, or ma\^ 
 
 (or shall) bathe" (present tense). 
 Q«F(LiiS'5u Qeyyil (sul)j. of Qey)-^umz=Gs:>J lSi^^l'd (^/yijihimy 
 
 " although (I, you, &c.) do, or may do." 
 ^£'c)^iin (igil'Um, ^^ry:Lc> dndl-um, "although it be" (cf.. 
 
 § 44 . 
 (gerfl^ ^ huldtu (gerund of hnl'i) + lun = « srf),! pj ih IculiWuniy 
 
 ** although (I, \ou, &c.) bathed" (past t^nse). 
 QuQpegi (o-er. < \ipPj:^i) + um= QuQii^ ._l peQi-y-um, "although 
 
 (I, we, they) spoke." 
 
 Auxiliary and Defective Verbs. 
 
 47. The following are some of the commonest : — 
 
 (a) @0 iri*, " be," §)(f^^^'Qp€ar irulcJciren, ^:^^Q^m irun- 
 den, '§)((hXjQucir iruppen, §)QP)^-bs irulcka. 
 
 These, added to the <,^erund, give the perfect, pluperfect, and 
 future perfect tenses ; as, (§<3i?i^^i kuliitu (having bathed) -h 
 ^^^^^sSlQpssr irukhiren (I d^m) = (^6^^^(^&QQpsi5r kuUWiruk- 
 kirerif " I have bathed." 
 
VERBS. 65. 
 
 Similarly, Tculitiu-^h-unden (T was) = @6yf^^^0/&(?^s<;r 
 5*irw/ir?Jw,**I had bathed"; hulittu-\-iruppen=r£^<oif)^0oT)U 
 
 _ kuiit- 
 
 firii/ide?t,*'lhsid bathed"; Jculittu-\-iruppen= r^(oifi^^i qt^uQ us^ 
 ktijitfiruppen, *' I shall have bathed." 
 
 From these can be formed the whole series of particijJes 
 and ])articii»ial nouns, as explained in paras. 31-84; e.g. Jntlit- 
 firuH-ira, Iml tVirunda, kulliV imhkum, Imlift irimdu, &c. 
 
 Iru added to the infinitive gives the snn^se of "to be about 
 to"; as, (§s(f)iss)9nTskiQm^ kulikJca-v-iruJckiren, "I am 
 about to bathe, or I am just going to bathe;" the same as 
 (^srf^-ssuQuir^i Qro sin kn likka-p-pogireii . 
 
 (b) QsiraUr kol (take or obtain for oneself), Qs^r&yi^QQpcST 
 kollu-qlrC'n, Otfus^CvL-s^r konden, Q ^ it &! (^Q (sn zb kolluve?j,. 
 Q^^rWknfla (§ 28, no. 32). 
 
 This verb also is a<lded to the gerund of another verb either 
 to L!;ive the latter a reflexive signification, or to express a con- 
 tinued nction ; e.g. 
 
 ^(svm @opi^ (SuinEj^'-iOsFfT^L-nea- avan iddivd/'igi-k-kotiddn^. 
 "he boupfht this for himself" (vdngi, having bought 
 (ger. of vdiigu) and konddn, he took). 
 
 0-S!TS5tn(bi QuirQrr) Qu:i_sFj (^-^^UUS^ld 0^6i;^;G*L£i.T 
 Q -^ ^ (^ rr Q .T n Q £u S3r jj}] Qu&iQ-zn ■ffkn—n h si^- liiudar avci' 
 ndi-p-p dittn, anda-p-pannttdi-p-pidungi-k-kondu por/ira 
 podu, inda-p-}mnam <;ell'nn-o (■ellndo*-v-enni prrik-ko?i-- 
 ddrgal, "the thieves seized (lit. havii.g seized) him. and 
 robi)ed him of the money (jo?rf"y/ 7/, having snatched, konduy 
 havintr taken), and, whilst going away, they said to one 
 another {pe(;i-k-konddrgal), ' Will this money pass current 
 (rellum-o) or will it not pass current (QrlJddO) ? ' " 
 The continuous action is more stiongly expressed by the 
 addition of the double auxiliary G) d ,1 sht^ rr^ kond'^ru to the 
 gerund of the principal verb. Kondiru is composed of kondUy 
 gerund of hoi, and root hu, explain d above, i hus : — 
 
 ^iTiT&siT gila kurudargal or idattil ceindu irandu-k-kond^- 
 irunddrgal, "some blind men having assembled in one 
 place, went on begging alms." 
 
 €^(fF, ^S)<a'<suzk LJ '35OT<5=LL/4L'«0Tr Qs^.'j^ o^ ff) ^ ff ^ su 'osi in u.-=mr 
 osS <bQs.t >o«jr is^Qr)iQ(nj<oisr OTU ku';avari pdndi-gattigal geydu 
 
 * gellddo = <^€llddu+Oi the enclitic expressing doubt. 
 Tami; Grammar S.-T. ' 
 
^6 VERBS. 
 
 vittu-c-civanam panni-k-Tcond'irukkirdn, " a potter is getting 
 
 his livelihood by making and selling pots and pans" (glva- 
 
 nam=Skt. jivana, livelihood, und panni, ger. oi pannu, to 
 
 effect or cause). 
 
 The verb si/<t vd or (suf^ varu (§ 28, no. 17) is similarly added 
 
 "to a gerund to express continuous action ; e.g. avan addi-c- 
 
 <ieydU'k-hondu varu-gdiyil, " whilst he was doing that " (varu- 
 
 gdiyilz=z\oQ,. of the verbal noun in ero^? ; see § 35). 
 
 (c) Qeusm® vendu, Qen^QQQro^ vendu-giren, Q<suo6stu^ 
 QoS^zk vrndincfj, (o(susm®(o(ousk vtnduven, Qisusmi— venda. 
 
 As a transitive verb, meaning "to entreat" or " to desire," 
 it is regularly conjugated. But as an intransitive verb, mean- 
 ing "to be necessary," "to be wanted," it is defective, the 
 forms in common use being Q(su€m®LCi vendum (vulg. Q^'sspah 
 venum, 3rd neut. fut.), "it (or they) will be necessary"; the 
 corresponding negative, Qsufsm-i—iTLa vdnddm (vulg. vendm or 
 vdndm), formed irregularly; the relative participles (jlsusmT 
 •QQro vcndugira), (oSusmu^S6r vendina, and (dsusi^l^lu vendlya. 
 These govern the dative case ; as, 
 ©-L£i<«(^ (ST^'oST (o6ij<om®Lc> umakku enna vendum, "what do 
 
 you want ? " (lit. to you what is necessary ?) 
 'Sisor<Sb(^ is^&n^LC: Qeu^sscTL-fTLh enakku 07ir\im venddm, "I do 
 not want anything " (lit. to me even one thing is imneces- 
 sary) . 
 ^S5)^<fQ<5^>'1 ■ft.ifoprr^ Qsuc'h'L^LLJ ussstld u^^ ^urriLi addi-c- 
 ceyglradafJu I vetijlya panam pattu richdy, "the money re- 
 quired to do it is ten rupees." 
 
 These, when used as auxiliaries, are attached to the infinitive 
 of the verb ; as, 
 
 fiafTsisr (sElL®^(^uQu[ts Q<susQOT®LCi ndn vittukku-p-poga ven- 
 dum, "I must go home " (lit. I to go home is necessary). 
 
 ^(ausor Qs=Lu.s (^jh/D^^&Dp^ ji IT LD sir (soft s :35 Q<3usi5ur® ih avan 
 qeyda kuf_t_attdi nlr mannikka vendum, " you must (please) 
 forgive the fault he has committed." 
 
 S.lkl>S(^-iD(^£bQ<S[T®,SB<SB QSUSSSTLS^LU <3^ ch U m La J5 n'^boTT Sf-^&QtSIT 
 
 QuCSusir ungalukku-k-kodukka vendiya ramhalam ndldik- 
 ku'k-koduppen, " I will give (you) to-morrow the wages 
 that ought to be given to you." 
 
 (d) ^ik.®La kudum, " it can be "; sl-i—it^ kudddu, " it cannot 
 be." See para. 41. 
 
VERBS. 67 
 
 OJ 
 
 (e) LnrnLCSL-sk mdtten,''! will not;' ''IcsLiinot"', LamL'^^riL 
 mattny, u^iTiLi_[Tek mdttCui, &c. (negative of mdttu), with the 
 infinitive; as, 
 
 ^ot),<^<fQ<5=(luj mtrtlQi-eai addi-c-ceyya mdtten, "I will not 
 
 doit." 
 / enir LuiTilL-inufr nl vara mdttdy-d, " will you not come ? " 
 (/) Similarly are used Quirr^Cn pdgum, " it will go (oi- do)," 
 Quit SIT, e^ pogddu, " it will not do "; Quit^lq pddum, " it will 
 suffice," QufTjSiT^ podddu, " it will not suffice "; ^(^^h tagum, 
 "it will fit," ^<siT^ tagddu, "it is not fit"; ^3;..^ld dg^im or 
 ^i,Lh dm, "it is proper," "it may" (§ 41), ^&7t^ dgddti, "it 
 is not proper"; ^ir^ih okkum, "it will agree," and £^<su(suit^ 
 ovvddu, " it does not agree." 
 
 '^uu(Sf.<3^Q<5=.l uuuQuiT&iT^ ippadi-c-ceyya-p-pOgddu, "it is 
 
 not fitt rh<]j to do so." 
 QuiTi'u Q<sFiiGoj^;Qro_^ ^(^LaiT poy collugiradu tagumd, "is 
 
 it proper to tell lies ? " 
 (g) To the above may be added ^em® undu, "there is {or 
 are)," from ^<av -fjj? (§ 17, c); ^euSsi; iJlili, "there is {or are) 
 not"; and ^eoev alia, " it is {or they are) not." (Cf. § 17, c, 
 44, and 52.) 
 
 Q^aiLi—d ^Qeo usi-sssir a.s?xjr© tottc^ttile paQuhhal iindu, 
 
 " there are cows in the garden." 
 @/bG'<« Qun<osr e.«jbr® Inge pan iindu, "there is gold here." 
 ^mQ<tB QuiTfok ^euSoD iiige pan illdi, " there is no gold here.'* 
 ^ff^j Oujear ^eoeo idu pari alia, "this is not gold." The 
 difference between illdi and alia is that the foi-mer denies 
 the existence of the subject, and the latter denies some- 
 thing said concerning it. 
 {h) Further, the verbs @® idu, " give" (p. 47), s£i® vidu, 
 *' leave" (§ 29), Quit® pddu, "put" (p. 47), Quit po, " go," 
 &s)(sij vdi, " put," in all their inflections, are commonly added 
 to gerunds either to intensify an action or to emphasize its 
 completeness. 
 
 Passive Voice. 
 
 48. (a) By the addition of u® padu ("suffer") in all its 
 inflections (cf. § 27, exc. a) to the infinitive, a compound verb 
 answering to the Passive Voice can be formed. Thus : — 
 
 uif^cft padihha, "to read" (inf. of padi) ; uu^^i&CuL. 
 padil'ha-p-pada, "to be read." 
 
68 VERBS. 
 
 Q<S[r&J6v Tcolla, "to kill" (inf. of hollu) ; QcasfrevGouuLLi—frek 
 
 kollii'p-pattdn, " he was killed." 
 ^^^uL-\'^v^<SLD <oT i=sr ^(o <ov ul^-eS'SuulLl-,^ andtt-p-pusta- 
 
 gam enndl-epadiJcha-p-pattadu/' thsit book was read by me.'* 
 
 STSSr^l'oQL-lU ^LC>l3 ^ ^T) L— ir -^ ofT [T GO Q <S [T &0 <oVLJU lLl-IJ SST eUnU- 
 
 ddiya tamhi tiriidargaldl Jtolla-p-pattdn, "my (younger) 
 
 brother was killed by thieves." 
 Sometimes padu is added to the root instead of to the infini- 
 tive; as, ^u^ULLi—fTeir adi-pattdn (instead of adUcka-p'pattdn)^ 
 " he was beaten." 
 
 (h) Q.3m un, "eat, enjoy, suffer": ^^^}]£i(Snn-^ unnu- 
 gire?i, ^'om(oL-s^sr tmden, ^c^ctQuv^ unben or g-55cr sgg^ /G^ojgar un- 
 riuvtn, ^skrsim unna. This verb is also added to the root of 
 another to form the passive ; as, Q<3bn-eo^]smL—iTek Jcol-l-unddn, 
 " he suffered death." 
 
 N.B. — This passive construction is not elegant, and should 
 not be used often. 
 
 Causative and Denominative Verbs. 
 
 49. Causative verbs are formed in several ways : — 
 
 (a) By adding lSI pi or 5^ vi to the root; as, fEuu^QQrosk 
 naya-Tckiren, "I love," (5iuui3'S>QQp:5sr naya-p-pi-kkiren, "I 
 cause to love "; <sfb&)^^psir katkiren, " I learn " (from ^^ kal)^ 
 <s>piSi{EQQpok kat-pi-kkiren, "I teach"; Qs=i'uQ(vjr)<sor Qeygiren^ 
 "I do," GffiuQhl<sQ(Sn^ssr Qey-vi-kkiren, "I cause to do." 
 
 (h) By doubling the final consonant of the root; as, g^® 
 Qcjrnissr, odu-giren, "I run," ^LL.®Q'^fDsk ottu-giren, " I cause 
 to run, I drive" (here d is doubled to tt) ; (qj^ "ascend," 
 (gyps' ''cause to ascend." 
 
 (c) By strengthening the root ; as, ^q^loL] tirumhu, " turn," 
 ^QF)U\-\ tiruppu, " cause to turn." 
 
 (d) By one of the suffixes r^ ku, <s- gu, (B du, ^ iu, q pu,. 
 Si ru ; as, Gu/r-^^ po-k-ku, " cause to go "; uiTLus^si- pdy-c-cu, 
 " cause to flow "; jsi—^^ nada-t-tu, " cause to walk." 
 
 (e) By means of the strong middle increment or tense- sign ^ 
 as, ^ifi'S^Dpzsr ari-giren, " I perish," ^ifi<ssQ(opssr ari-kkiren, 
 "1 destroy." See also para. 29. 
 
ADVERBS, POSTPOSITIONS. 69 
 
 50. The following are few examples of verbs derived from 
 nouns and adjectives : — 
 
 uujsQp^ payakkiradUf "it yields fruit" (from payan, 
 
 Skt. phala, fruit) . 
 iSffsn9ik&i'^rosk piragdgikJciren, "I shine" (from piragd- 
 
 ^am, Skt. prakd.s'a). 
 eueSlQQ/Desr valigiren, "I force" (from vali, Skt. halin, 
 
 "strong"). 
 
 Adverbs. 
 
 51. (a) A number of infinitives serve as adverbs ; e.g 
 
 ' nv«c« palakka, "loudly," ^qt^lBs^ orumikha, "together," 
 huuL- oruppada, "together," Qlosv&j mella, "slowly," 
 '3 ka(/uga, "speedily." 
 
 (b) As a rule, however, adverbs are formed from substantives 
 V the iiddition of ^li ay or 4:^^ dga; e g. •fn-SLn Qugam, "health," 
 •ldhuj rugain-dy, "well"; jssk^ nanru, "that which is good," 
 jE^QTHLj niTirdy, " well." 
 
 j)j^ck (xLn(vev jS^e6ruufT<s: ^'^^ip^sireor adan mele nindipp*- 
 
 dga irunddn, " he was (lost) in thought upon it." 
 ^^'u or c^5« added to a noun shows it to be a complement 
 of the predicate (§ 61). 
 
 ^.£5 is also used in adding up; as, 
 <s (T <ov /b <s 'T w ir & (sir jsir^ QuiuHr <stT<ouev!T(offi3sm u^^ Quuurr 
 ^« u^^s)^jQuuj(T kdvatkdrargal ndlu peyar kdval-dligal 
 paitu peyar dga padindlu-peyar, "four watchmen and ten 
 prisoners, altogetlier lourteen persons." 
 
 Postpositions. 
 
 52. Some of these are infinitives and govern the nouns 
 which they follow; as, ^s^ir tavira, "except" (inf. of tavir, 
 remove) : 
 
 erek LD<s^sor^^sQir Lapp er&jeorrQ^u^ en^^^rr&m en maga- 
 
 ndi-t-tavira matta elldrum vanddrgal, "all others came 
 
 except my son." 
 
 Similarly, Qufreo pola (inf. of polu, resemble) and (^ip giira, 
 
 " round " (inf. of guru, surround) govern the accusative. But 
 
 QiIl. hitta, "close" by" (inf. of kittu, approach) takes the 
 
70 
 
 CONJUNCTIONS. 
 
 genitive or dative; as, j^^^ QlLl. adin hitta or j^js^jhrs^ 
 QlL^. (I datku-Jc-ki t ta, " nenY it"; and «^/_ Jcuda, " to^eih^^r" 
 (inf. of ki'idu, ji»in) the instrumental in odu; as, ^o-G^^® 
 si^L- (suj avanOdu Jcuda vd, " come with liim." Q<siro6cr® hondUy 
 the tjerund of Q^Birdi- hoi, "to take" (para. 47 6), is similarly 
 used with an accusative. It has then the signification " by 
 means of," "thi-.u^h"; as, ^(56)^-iQ^ir.^& addi-h-honduy 
 " by means of it " (lit. by taking or using it). So also, (§rSl^^ 
 kurittu (i^emnd of kuri), "concerning"; urbfiS! patti (ger. of 
 pattu), " regarding "; Q;SJii® tottu (ger. of todu), "touching." 
 
 Other postpositions in common use are; — 
 
 ^L-SN udan, together with. 
 ^& dga, for; as, ena..hlga, 
 
 "for me ' ' {enahkii + Cuja) . 
 OuiTQ^iKbi poruttu, I for the 
 ^i£i^3Lanii>ntta'm, ) sake of . 
 Q_<ov ul, within. 
 q/T'^-o jpuraw, outside. 
 (ipssr nmn. before. 
 iSsi^ pin, after. 
 Qld3v met, upon (vdth gen.). 
 (Lp^&b mudal (or mudaldga), 
 
 begimiing from. 
 euL^ vari (or variydga), by 
 
 way of. 
 ^Lg Jcir, below (with gen.). 
 
 ^s3OTi5E)L_ anddi, near. 
 
 <sij<ooiriULo vardiywn (vardik- 
 kum, vardii/ilum), up to 
 the limit, as long as. 
 
 Quifl&o peril, upon, concern- 
 ing. 
 
 LaiLQia mattum, until. 
 
 ^GOo\}jLnGo illdinal, without. 
 
 <§),sisrrSl inri, without. 
 
 ^eoovn Lceo allclmal, besides 
 (with ace). 
 
 ^m cf)l anri, except. 
 
 ui^ padi (or padikku), as. 
 according to. 
 
 @ l1(D ittu (ger. ) , on account of. 
 
 Conjunctions. 
 
 53. {a) s./-*Q um added to two or more words means "and." 
 When affixed to a sinp^le word it has the signification of " also,'* 
 "too," or "even," according to the context; e.g. 
 
 (^^(oiy)]T'i:3^frrr_^'i'n QsiiTL-i—-ksn fr^nh <sn ^ ^ [t fr <s &t kudirdik- 
 kdran-um tOttakkdran-um vanddrgal, "the horsekeeper and 
 the gardener came." 
 ^s.'^^jLo Quir^ok avan-um pondn, " he also went, or even 
 
 he went." 
 Vm is also added to interrogatives to express universality ; 
 e.g. uuiifrLiT ydvar, "who?" (pL), luitsijq^lJd "all people"; 
 Luifioosu ydvdif "what things?" oj/reroeuii^zii "all things"; 
 
INTEREOGATIVES. 71 
 
 (oTfEj^ eiigu, "where"; <5Tfb(^Lh "everywhere"; (Stuuu^. eppadi^ 
 ** how ? " GJuuL^LLjih " by all means." 
 
 Observe also the following uses of um : 
 
 Qld&u mel, "over," mel-um, "moreover." 
 iSlsoriJsar pinne, " after," plnne-y-um, " besides." 
 si6V6vrr LSlmbsif^(&^ih did i>llldigal-um, "all children." 
 
 Ella requires the addition of mn to the noun which it quali- 
 fies, in whatever case it may be ; as, elld idlldigaldi-y-um (ace). 
 But si6v6vir(if.Lh eUdr-um, "all people," (5r^)evifir^ elldm (for 
 elld-7(m), " every thintij," being pronouns, immediately follow" 
 the nouns to which they are in apposition ; e.g. 
 
 (^ixL^a^err loTgbeu/r.j^/b Q.y^^/uG°Lj''^/f<5;(oTr kudigal dldr-um 
 (•ettu-p'ponargal, " all the villagers arc dead and gone." 
 
 Elldm (i.e. elld-\-um) is declined by affixing ^jbs^ attu 
 (^ 15, c, 2) to elld to form the inflectional base, and then, 
 adding the case- terminations with um ; thus the ace. of elldm 
 would be loi&jejii <suii)>r6)ni)iLiLh elld-v-attdi-y-um. (Here v and 
 y are euphonic insertions; attu + di becomes att'di, see para. 
 12, i. a). 
 
 For other uses of um, see paras. 24, c, 38, 39, and 46. 
 
 (h) " Or" ■= ^eoeo ^ alia d.u (the neut. participial noun of at). 
 
 The correlatives "either . . .or" must be translated by 
 ^ichj-]^ dvad'i (part, noun neut. fut. of a, "be") . . . dvaduy. 
 or by ^^^a,vLo dgilum . . . dijilum, or by c^t^^ji'^ dndlum . . . 
 dndlum, added to the alternative subjects. ^S^jyjLf) djilum 
 also means "although," "soever"; as, ^zk nis'uuiiiu(^'d>s^La 
 c'tnnn-p-payyan dgilum, "although a small boy"; (oitkj^os ^Q' 
 gy/Lo eiige dgilum, " wheresoever." 
 
 Interrogatives. 
 
 54. (a) To ask a question, you simply add ^ a to the end 
 of a sentence or to any word in it on which you wish to la^r 
 stress ; as, 
 
 ^isu&sr (o^rri^L-S<s5frrri^ avan tottahJcdran-d, " (is) he a. 
 gardener? " or avan-d tottakkdran, " (is) he tlie gardener? '" 
 
"72 EMPHATIC PARTICLES. 
 
 (b) If you add ^ o, jou express a certain amount of doubt 
 or hesitation ; as, 
 
 (ipmC^m QuiTusraisir (Fi^su^S'iujQ^ mvnne ponavaji vdit- 
 iiijan-d, "is he the doctor (I wonder) who went in front?" 
 |& is also affixed to an interroiiative or to the last word of 
 a clause containing an interrogative, to give it an indefinite 
 .-signification; as, oi/sG'db enge, "where?" ^'irkQcsQajn- einjc-y-o, 
 ""somewhere or other"; ct^ (si—<S(^QLDPr, ^^ jBi—^^^ih edu 
 ynadaJi'kum-o, adu nidakhum, "whatever will happen, (tbat) 
 will liappen." 
 
 (c) As already mentioned in para. 10. the letters ir e and 
 ojiT yd (or ^ a) are prefixed to words to form interrogatives ; 
 
 ;as, ioTLJLJLCL eppadi, "in what manner?" "how?" ^uQuiJ(l£:^ 
 epporudu, '' tit Avhat time?" "when?" <sTSi.isk evan, 'which 
 man? " ^6)jeheval, " which woman? " ot^; < du, "which thing? " 
 (among several) ; iSTsk&nr enna {^siirserLD, dec-liDable form ; cf. 
 p. 34), " what ? " and sjsw- en, " why ? " (e is lengthened). So 
 -.also ojiKSijssr ydvan, " what man ? " LUfrii ydr or ^fr Cir, " who ? " 
 ^4urT^ yddu, "wliat?" (neut.). E.g. 
 
 ^evsk j^eo^Q Luuuu^ (or Quj'ljQufTCLp ■-) <h=Qs=lu^S!I sur avan 
 addi-y-eppadi (or -y-epporudu)-C'Ceyddn, " how (or when) 
 did he do that ? " ' 
 
 g,/B'3« <su_!3SisiaT (oTsu^ inge vandaval eval, "who (is) she 
 
 that came here ? " 
 CT^ uSi^^sxiLD jseveu^ edu migavum nalladu, "which is the 
 
 best?" 
 :2_s3r Quit ioTeisn56T un per enna, " what is your name? " 
 ^^ ujiTQ^eoL-oj a?® idu ydruddtya vldu, " whose house is 
 
 this?" 
 •^isor QufTiii Q 'ff' a eo c^jQ (nj lu en poy gollugirdy, "why do you 
 
 speak falsehood ? " 
 ^Q^Q&si6sr(fr/eo {=:adu + en-\-enrdl) or ^Q^Qsiv^ev (adu 
 + en + enil)y "if (you) say why that is (i.e. wherefore)." 
 
 Emphatic Particles. 
 
 55. The vowel ^ e is added to words for the sake of em- 
 phasis; as, 
 
 iSB<5aiL.uSQ<sv ^i^rjoJiSlev^sx) haddiyiUe onrum illdi, "there is 
 
 nothing in the bazaar." 
 €UQr)&(nr/'(o(56i varugirdne, "he does come." 
 
INTERJECTIONS. 73 
 
 The reflexive pronoun ^nek Lin is also used to emphasize 
 nouns ; as, 
 
 ^susor ^suudr ^/fejr avan tagappan tun, "he (is) indeec 
 the father." 
 
 The two participial nouns ^Gsrnussr dmvan and (Stswljs sw- 
 enbavan, of roots <7, "be," and <m, "say," lu all the genders 
 singular and plural, are employed in the same way ; e.g. 
 
 ioO^^^S,^'iLi<^)osr(suf'iaT jseoeo LDi8aPi;Sr,sT vaitliijan cinavan nalla 
 
 manidan, ** the floctor is a good man." 
 ^LLi—dSLnii&ST^ uS.^o^Lh Qj5i9-ii^ L£!(r^<SLCi otfagam dnadu miga- 
 
 vum nediya mirugam, " the camel is a very tall animal." 
 
 Also j^&ofj\)Q(Suir allav'', or allO; as, ^(sum j^ieoQeoii smm^ 
 ivan alio kalian, " is not indeed this man the rogue ? " 
 
 Interjections. 
 
 56. The following are some of them : — 
 
 ^QtuiT diyo, alas! I g)G'^/r ido, lol 
 
 ^etoiuQujir diydiyo, alas 1 alas ! j gp|5 do, oho ! 
 
SYNTAX. 
 
 57. The syntactical arrangement of a Tamil sentence 
 ((SLiiT&QiuLD, ISkr. vakija) is in many respects similar to tbat 
 of an ordinary Sanskrit sentence. As a rule, first comes the 
 subject with its attributes, second the object with its enlarge- 
 ments, third the extension of predicate, and lastly the verb. 
 
 As in classical Sanskrit, so in Tamil there is the usual 
 predominance or gerunds (para. 31, ii.) and the clauses formed 
 by them, of relative participles which take the place of rela- 
 tive clauses ([jara. 31, i.), and of oratio recta instead of oratio 
 obliqua (para. 65). 
 
 58. The Subject (<or(Lp<3ij[Juj eruvay). — If this is only a 
 pronoun, it is often not expressed, being understood from the 
 finite verbal form after the manner of Latin and Sanskrit, 
 P'.ovided that its omission does not involve ambiguity or make 
 the subject less emphatic; e.g. Qi'FiuQQpzk geygirm, *' I do" 
 (not nan ^fygiren) ; ^<o6)^4'Q<3'iu^n-iosr addi-c-ceyddn, "he did 
 it" (not avan addi-c-ceyddn, unless for the sake of emphasis). 
 
 59. The Extension of the Subject (sT(Lp(sun-Lu<g5(^ s.fflcF 
 Qs^ird) eruvdi/Jd'u uriccol). — This consists of dependent nouns 
 or pronouns, adjectives (para. 17), and relative clauses with 
 or without subordinate adverbial clauses. All these precede 
 the subject ; e.g. 
 
 OTcw- ^L£)l5),^sd)l_uj Queir^^rr^ Q<f^^ljQu!T(^(S(t en tamhi- 
 nuddii/a joengddi qettu-p-pondl, ""my (younger) brother's 
 wife is dead." 
 
 6&0 jB&o<oo QLai'uuu<oofiiE}Q& 61] ^ IT sk 07'u Tialla meyvpan iUge 
 vanddn, " a good shepherd came here." 
 
 (vLn(^<ov Quni^ok enda uyirdi-y-um kolldda oru r^anniydgi 
 oru eri-Tc-Jcardi mele pondn, " an ascetic who never killed 
 any living creature went along the bank of a lake." 
 
SYNTAX. 75 
 
 tsueSi^Ln ^iF^ Lc>^0^^-mQ&b2tsv it'ige odi vandu inda pil- 
 laiydi-i-tukki y-eduJckuni valimdl anda manidanukJc' illdi, 
 "to that man there is not the strength to run up l^ere 
 and lift this child." Here valimdi is the subject, and 
 all that precedes it is the extension of the subject, the 
 i^oninds Odi vandu and tukki being enlargements of the 
 future relative participle edukkum. 
 
 60. The Object {Gls'iULJu^QuiiQTfm <}eya-p-padu-porul) is 
 jHit in the accusative case, and in colloquial Tamil the sign of 
 the case is always expressed if the object denotes a rational 
 l)t'ing (§ 14, i.), otherwise the nominative is generally used; 
 ;is, r^jrjDLo ussin-(o5iin:CS)fh "he committed a fault." As in the 
 (•;ise of the subject, the attributes of the object generally pre- 
 cede the object itself ; e.g. 
 
 ST (su nS)l ;£ tj:i ^ S5r QslLl— 6i'fTrr^05)^<£^r{qLD Qus'itQ^ evvida- 
 mdna krtta vdiildigaldi-y-um perdde, "don't speik bad 
 language of any kind wbatever." 
 
 Quotations and noun-scnteuces with <5T6k^ enru often form 
 the object of a sentence ; e.g. 
 
 ^eueisr ^L[LUjfT ssieu^sor ^(as)LpuLSl<osr^ (qJsst ^lLs5jL-&Ql^'^ 
 ^uQu.j iii^ frQtusisrjoi (o<Sili—iTsaravanku(Hydfiavandl ardip- 
 piftu en r7ttdi-k-kirittu-p-pottdy erjru ketUln, " he, having 
 summoned t!ie villager, asked him, ' Why did you tear up 
 the receipt ? ' " 
 
 61. Thk Extension of Predicate (jj,'so)L_Qai^L|9 addi- 
 ,„ori).— This includes gerundial clauses and words and phrases 
 denoting time, ].lace, manner, j.urpose, <fec. They always 
 precede the pred-ca^e, and sometimes even the principal 
 sentence ; e.g. 
 
 jSfTLD j^i'b^^s l£^ iSisx-'^sQujuuiSf-u'^uiTQahJiTu:^ nam aiige 
 mm pidikka-y-eppadi-p'pdv6m, "how shall we go there to 
 
 fish ! " ■ . , 
 
 ji sTuQufT,^ <BBeo!r ^^(SuiTLu nl eppodu karai eruvdy, "when 
 will you get on shore ? " 
 
 fEiTiS'skiis^roi § 0ij/£<jrsor Q^iuiLevsrCa nam inrdikku y-enna 
 reyyaiam, "what may we do to-day? " (ndni, "we," in- 
 cludes the person addressed ; §16). 
 
 ^£u^ is^iKbi'irsu'^ufTi'u ^oTO^^QcfiF.L'^/ro^ avan vlttukku-p-^ 
 poy [for poyi] addi-c-ceyddn,"he, havi n g gone home, did it. 
 
76 SYNTAX. 
 
 ^ifi¥^^^'j^hr rdvagdrl adugaldi tan vittile Jcondu pay vdltV- 
 iruiiddn, *' the banker, having taken those things to his 
 house, kept (them there)," 
 For examples of subordinate sentences, see the following 
 paragraphs. 
 
 62. The Predicate (uuj66B^ payaTiildi) must, of course, 
 agree with its subject in gender, number, and person, except 
 in the case of neut. plural, when the sing, is often substituted. 
 
 (ti) In Simple sentences the verb "to be" is generally 
 omitted ; as, 
 
 ^sieor (sishr u^&sk ivan en magan, "this (is) my son." 
 
 Tt is sometimes expressed (less elegantly) by the verb irn 
 -with ay added to the noun preceding it(§ 51, h) ; as, en tanddi 
 kafjtakkan or kanakhan-dy irukkirdn, "my father is an ac- 
 countant." 
 
 When in English an adjective (or a past participle) follows 
 the verb " to be," in Tamil this adjective is usually turned 
 into a noun agreeing with the subject in gender, number, and 
 case (cf. § 18). Thas, "she is good"=: aval nallaval (not 
 aval nalla) ; " you (masc.) are learned '' = nlr (tdn) padittovar ; 
 ^* that is not bad ''=adti kettadu alia. 
 
 If the subject consists of two or more nominatives of dif- 
 ferent persons, the verb in the plural agrees with the first 
 person, or with the second if there is no first; as, hdn-utn, 
 nl-y-um en magal-um povom, " you and I and my daughter 
 will go "; nl-y-um, aval-um povii-gal, " she and you will go." 
 
 Verbs in a sentence which have the same subject are ex- 
 pressed by gerunds, except the last. (See para. 31, ii. c.) 
 
 (6) In Complex sentences the adverbial clauses of condition 
 and concession ("if," "although," "but," &c.) must always 
 precede the principal sentence ; e.g. 
 
 c^^ JI^LJUU^ ii9 (f^ IE ^ IT 6v , jirb<S€rr Qu!t<s Q (Su ssst l- it th adu 
 appadi y-irunddl, nlngal pnga venddm, " if that be so, you 
 must not go " (see paras. 43-44). 
 
 ^ib&m ioT<5Gr<B(^-9'<s'LnU'mLh Q&tT®^s;rr^jLr, Qeu'Seu Q<3=luuj 
 LnniLQu-sk nlngal enakku-c-cambalam koduttdlum, veldi 
 geyya mdtten, "although you may give me wages, yet I 
 will not do the work (§ 46)." 
 
SYNTAX. 77 
 
 (c) Similarly, adverbial clauses of time, cause, &c. ; as. 
 
 <3S&r ndlvnr Jcudi-k-kondu Or urukhu-p-piraf/dna-p-pattu-p- 
 pogdii/il, viriyil dr pana-mudippu-k-kandu iduftdrrjal, 
 " while four people were together making a journey lo a 
 village, they saw and picked up a purse of money on the 
 way." 
 LSir/r(SJ53f]«(cr5-«(^ jsire^jij &itgo<b&t ^:^-kS^ip uiSLtLirev ^jsi<s 
 {^■i^ jSif j:i}]^!TGo(?(QuasT (oTS3i\^La QuiT pirdnigalukku ndlu 
 kdlgal irukkira padiydl adugalukku ndlukdUjwan ennum 
 per, "as animals have (each) four legs, they are called 
 quadrupeds." 
 
 63. (a) The Adverbial Clauses of Time are formed by the- 
 addition of Qj^k mun, (ipssrCoSGr munne, (LpsarsBrLD munnam, 
 (Lf^sb osiQld munname, or (Lpsarq munhu (all meaning " before ") 
 to the future relative participle ; and i^sm pin, iSldrn pinhu, 
 LSr>'_§ piragu, or iSpu.i® pitpddu ("after") to the past rela- 
 tive participle; as well as Quaq^,^ porudu or (its contracted 
 form) (ouiT_^ pOdu, sfrevLci kdlam, <FLCiUJLCi Qamayam ('^ tinie^') 
 to the relative participle, past, present, or future ; e.g. 
 
 ^SiJcir (^sifisC'^ih (Lfi^t^CoLn ^oO^<g'Qs^iu^iT6Br avan kulik- 
 kum munname addi-c-ceyddn, "he did that before he 
 bathed." 
 ^(Suoh- (^ifjotf)^^ lS.-hitl/ ^<ss)^s'Q<3'U-^its^ avan kulitta pinbu 
 
 addi-c-ceyddn, " he did that after he had bathed." 
 ^ Ell sir Qi<ff-^0 (suir^^ jEtjm ^(LpQcsesr avan qetta podu ndn 
 aruden, " I wept when he died." 
 
 The infinitive and the locative of the verbal noun in kdi are 
 also used for the same purpose. See paras. 35 and 38. 
 
 (h) The Adverbial Clauses of Cause ("because," "as," 
 " since," &c.) are formed either by means of the instrumental 
 in rd of the participial or verbal noun (§ 32 and 35), or by 
 adding uisjuuireo padiydl (instr. oipadi, "step") to the relative 
 participle of the respective tense ; e.g . 
 
 ^iLi^Qex) ^^\& ^(7^<BQfD^^&^> J5frdr <s66)L-'i(§u(Su[r<s 
 ■shlev^ vlttiUe arigi irukkiradijidl nan kaddikku-p-poga-v- 
 illdi, " I do not go to the bazaar, because there is rice in- 
 the house." 
 
78 SYNTAX. 
 
 jSevLo Qld^^ r^jjuq ^(S6)3>ujiTev, ji U(oOoa)<as Qufri— Q(SU(FrJsr 
 (BIld nilam meita caiuppu dcjdiydl, ni palagdi poda venduni, 
 ** as the ground is very marshy, you must lay down a 
 plank." 
 
 jBHssr Q(sii26v<S'^uQu[T<fB Q en ssar lql LU ul^luit&o, ^-isQn Lnin'u 
 (o^Qlo&s)<f ^£511.® Ld ndnveldihku-p-]Jocjciven(litjapa(jiydl, 
 c/tkhiramdy te-megdi dgattum, "' please get the tea ready 
 soon, as I must go to work," 
 
 <s\^ ^L-i^Qev (Sun jb^Qu^ {iSiirf-kSiro ut^iuirev, fsir^wQ'S 
 <aij^(o;^Gsr en v'lttil-e vdndi-pedi y-iricMcira padiydl, nCiri iiige 
 vauden, "I came here because there is cholera in my house " 
 (this can also be expressed by iruhklrctdindl instead of 
 irukhb^a padiydl \ compare also para. 45). 
 
 (c) To form Clauses of Purpose, ui£^ padi, ui^<k(^ padUd'u, 
 ui^ LUiT'S padiydga, or QuiTfif)'!.® poruttu is used with the 
 future relative participle ; as, 
 
 0*^/7 d5 §55' ^Q«.'r©-^@LD ULS^L (or ui^ii^-s}, &c.) ^eu^r enjB^iTsk 
 Qodamli-k-hodttJcJium padl (or padihku, &c.) avan vanddn, 
 **he came for the purpose of being examined." 
 
 The same may be expressed by the simple infinitive or by 
 the participial noun, neut. sing, present or future, in the 
 dative ; as, Qddajidi-k-hodukJca (or kodukkiradatku) va7iddn. 
 
 64. Comparison.- — (a) Similarity or likeness is commonly 
 ■expressed either by the words uai padi, 'FLDtTssrLh c^amdtjuin, 
 <Fifl rari, Lon^tf} mddiri, and tbe like, or by the ver])al root 
 Quneo pol or its infinitive Qutr&j pola, preceded by the noun 
 {verbal or otherwise) with which the comparison is made ; e.g. 
 
 ^(SU^ffT QuSrS)nO UUjL (or LDfT^lfl) ^ISir^^Lh (oU<3= Q<SUZSi5T®Lh 
 
 avan pecugira padi (or mddiri) itdn-um pega vendum, "as 
 
 he speaks, I also must speak " (padi preceded by the 
 
 relative participle). 
 @/H^ (^^i<ss)ir ^j^i-PBr^s'S'Lnn^isrLCi inda kudirdi adukku-c- 
 
 camdTiam, " this horse is like that one " (lit. ** similar to 
 
 that"). 
 w<fB<sir ;5iT<ss>iuuQu(rGb ^(f^sQ(fr/<5iT magal tdydi-p-pOl iruk- 
 
 kirdl, *' the daughter is like the mother " (pol or j^ola 
 
 governs the ace, § 52). 
 jsnsk uu^'S&IrD^^ Qufrev, 0[l\u^ uu^ks Q6us5ar®La nan padih- 
 
 kiradu pola, nl-y-um padikka vendunif " as I learn, you 
 
 also must learn." 
 
SYNTAX. 79 
 
 ^(Su^oBTuQufrev jBiresr f5'^eosi]^uSl((^isQQro^ avandi-p-p6la, 
 
 nan nallavandy irukkircn, " 1 am as good as he." 
 ^,^'Ljl9@)6u Qurreb anuppindl pol, " as if one would send." 
 Tlie correlatives sT(su€U6fr(Si^ . , . j)] cu en (ofr si^ evvalavu 
 avvahiva, " how much ... so much," OTLJutf . . . j)juuu;l 
 eppadi . . . appadl, " as . . . so," are also iised for purposes 
 of comparison. 
 
 (6) To express the Com|>arative Degree, you put the noun 
 with which the comparison is made either simply in the dative 
 or in the ablative of place whence, with or without the addi- 
 tion of uni ; e.g. 
 
 ^oi^jga/^C^ ^siifcr j5Goev(Sii^<sr avanuklcu Ivan nallavan, "^tliis 
 
 person is better than he." 
 j^^^ (i£iLii^zyj o (or £lLis^ 6u) ;§) :j^ ^i^sin^^ anda vltt'd-um 
 
 (or vltt'd) idu arugdnndii, " this house is more beautiful 
 
 than that." 
 uii iTss pthkhi (inf. oi par, " see," >f 38), U'r/r-'oS^/zh pdrk- 
 kiluin ("although you see," § 46), and the inf. sB^^ vida ("to 
 leave ") are also used to express the comparative ; as, 
 
 ^(Su^bsBTuuiihiBs, (or uirh-k^^vLa or q)9l_) (^(su-ssr Q blL'SS)'^ 
 
 lu IT <o6i €1} 1^ avandi-p-pdrkka (or pdrkkiluiii or vida) Ivan 
 
 nettdiydtiavan, "this man is taller than he." 
 
 (c) Similarly, with the additional aid of a word denoting 
 universality, the Superlative Degree is expressed; e.g. 
 
 jajeu:' seir (sr&jevirffl^jLh ^susifr m^ii^^iisurm avargal I'lldril-um 
 ivan puftimdn, "this man is the wisest of them all" (see 
 p. 37). 
 The Sanskrit words 0(5jr:l/_i-b rin'ttam (for srestka), s.^ 
 ^LDLo uttamam, and the like are often used for this purpose. 
 
 65. Quotations. — (a) As in Sanskrit iti, so in Tamil GTsin jqi 
 enru (the i^erund of ^sir en, " say," § 31, ii. a) is used at the 
 end of a direct quotation instead of quotation marks. Some- 
 times the infinitive srsor eTia, the participial nouns srsmu,^ 
 enbadu and ^eisrQfiD^ engiradUy and the finite verbal form otsst 
 (iT^sk cnrdn ("he said "), are used for the same purpose; e.g. 
 
 jp[Tissr uiTi—Lo ui^^Q^Q<oi5rek^ Q<3=ir6ir(m)ssr ndn pddam pa- 
 ditten enru qonndn, " he said, ' I have learnt the lesson.' " 
 
 euir <bim eijj vd ena vd, "when he says 'Come,' come" (see 
 para. 38). 
 
80 SYNTAX. 
 
 f'"udan enhaddi nan vlriivd'^ikJcx v-illiii, " I do not believe 
 that (which will say) * He is a thief.' " 
 
 ^/Q^soT'oBT <sL(SQL- (oUfreQjn-iiWyCv^ <5Tsir(7r/>ssr id/enna kattdi 
 pol irulchuoCe enrdn, "he said, * What is this which is indeed 
 like a log of wood ? '" 
 
 (h) When the quotation is not quite exact, ^ib ay or .^m 
 dga is added to ersw^ enru, &c. : 
 
 jgrrek Qunuj Qrffireoex) maLL(oi-Q(oN-sij(fr/'<ss'Qs'ii issr^sii nan 
 poy Qolla mdtten enr dga-c-connan, '* he said (what amounts 
 to) 'I will not speak falsehood.' " 
 
 (c) When it is indirect, ^<£b dga aloiie is used ; as, 
 ^rrdr <snrif>(3u^fT£B<FQ^frsar(^cor tdn varuvad' dga-c-conniin, "he 
 said that he would come." 
 
 QQ. Ellipsis. — In poetry ellipsis is very frequent. In col- 
 loquial Tamil the sign of the genitive singular of neuter nouns- 
 is omitted, and, as a rule, that of the accusative singular ; so 
 also the plural sign <s&t after a numeral ; e.g. 
 
 LaLT^^uuL^Ld marattu-jp-param, "the fruit of a tree." 
 
 c^/b^ iSsk dttu min, " a river-fish." 
 
 Here the genitive termination is omitted. Both marattu and 
 dttu are the inflectional bases of maram and dru (see paras. 
 12, i. a, and 15, c, 1). 
 
 (oTevr iS0^ Q:3BfT(Ei en hatti hodu, ''give (me) my knife" 
 
 Qcatti for hattiydi, ace). 
 ^^ <s5irssoru^ (sufrikQ^Q^siTs^k-® eun- dru karandi vdngi-k- 
 
 kondu vd, "buy and bring six spoons." 
 
 [The student will find in Tamil Sblf-Taught (the companion 
 volume to the present), a large number of conversational phrases and 
 sentences for every-day use, classified according to subject, which will 
 serve as very useful and practical exercises in translation into and 
 from the Tamil ; also many classified Vocabularies, and an English- 
 Tamil alphabetical Vocabulary.] 
 
Part U. 
 EXERCISES. 
 
 [Do not overlook the euphonic insertions, elisions, and changes oF 
 letters occurring in the following exercises. For Key to the Exercises^ 
 
 see p. 85.] 
 
 I. 
 
 1. ^rb(o£B (SUIT. 2, euQ^Q'^/sssT, ggwjfr. 3. a.£3r U5«( 
 .5fL-i_ 6vir Qeusm(biLCi. 4. ^eu[T<s^r 2.(sfrG*(srr eujr<3=Q<fFfT&bjFyi. 
 
 eujsjS Qufr(Lp^ (or (Suit^^ (oTssT'Si^ (oT^eviTLa Q<9=ii <osr<^oor.. 
 
 7. ^(SOLDuSeS^/F^ QjPirfTiU eU^^mUIT ? 8. <oT<oSr 6a)as(o<£5lT(S0- 
 
 10. ^lL®k(^LjQuiT, 
 
 II. 
 
 1. Open the door. 2. Please look at the rice-fields. 3. They 
 are green. 4. The sky is blue. 5. There are trees in our 
 ganU'n. 6. Those are not trees. 7. Call the servant. 8. Give 
 me some water. 9. I have no water. 10. I must wash my 
 hands. 
 
 in. 
 
 1. jprrib'SB&r Q,g=sirserLJUL-L-€saT<g^,SB(^u(DUfr<s GayOTrOfi.. 
 2. ^^^^ffl&j '?=mikis&] (oT^^'^? 3. ^lEiQ-s ^C5.^-^ =^^ 
 
 6. <SiJL^[i^(o6v (qj^ireu^ ^u[TLL'(LfiS6srL-.[r ? 6. /FfTi^ lSI F ^u rr >5usr ua 
 (ouirQeviTLD, (SUIT. 7. jsitlo <3s<soL^<S(^u(oU[rLu Q<sfr(^s'Lh ^ifiB,. 
 Q/^i'u, cBSfiS, lq^.tSsu (SiJfTfk](§(o(SutTih. 8. Q<sijQrr)sor66r (snamm 
 Qeu^iLD. 9. Qf5eb€ULU&o<S(srf^(oev ^®Qp Quifluj uj/r§5OT<ffi3srr 
 QjBj^Q uirQ^iki^eir. 10. ujfT'856ra9sk ^lclSI<sb'SO<s uSaet^Lh- 
 
 IV. 
 
 1. My elephant bathes every day in that tank. 2. I do not 
 know whether there is good water in it or not. 3. Look ho\\r 
 many men and women are going to drink. 4. The coolies pub. 
 
 Tamil Grammar 8.-T. ^ 
 
«2 EXERCISES. 
 
 •down their loads, and go and drink, and then return and take 
 them up again. 5. Having acquired much wealth hy selling all 
 his goods, he proceeded to return home. 6. On his way, in a 
 forest, thievt's attacked liiiu and took away all his property. 
 
 7. Afterwards they both became poor and arrived at their home. 
 
 8. He spoke like one who has know^n me for many days. 9. That 
 person whom you told yesterday to come in the morning has 
 now come here. 10. We cannot wait for a month, you must 
 48end it to-morrow morning. 
 
 ^Lfiuqub'^ ioieiirSln) utpQiaTL^uui^ ^sst^Q^itjjjld Q^sn-^-fim 
 
 ■€uiTssr. 2. Qu<9?Qrr)Quir_^ ^6sr<F^^LCi (^LJUU^aS^m'SsSlro^^iT 
 ^uuL^Qiu (suiiB^QroCouir^Ln @(5««LL®Lfl (§ 42, d). 
 
 e\)ti(sn^ <ST(L^S&s)^km-L-LS^ a.65r«;^_c2rQ^rfl£L//r sSiLi—rr&j (§ 44) 
 :^eor <su J ^ ^ jj IT <ss) If kQ ^s m . 5. ^sniT jaj ^ ^ s^ £" ssr iki s'^sfr ^ s c6m & 
 
 jfsrfr&m. 7. ^uQuiT(Lp^ ^q^ (^q^l-'J it iT !S eujks^ ^^/(^^(^ 
 
 (ip^UiT<S5 aS(Lp^£i] (SUeSCriEjQ, ^S6UTL-eijQir ^LCi<S(9)'SF^^^Ln[r 
 
 ^U)ev, !o] (ch'bssr <E <3r ^ ^ Lct IT 'h <s ^iMLct[Teo ^(^Lxt <oT 6ur rn? Sir . 8. ^eu 
 ■^^^ ^LLu(y^(y^&r!e>tr^'Bocr^^^^j2n^k£i<sQ,SirsfkrL-iTiT&6k. 
 
 VI. 
 
 1. At that time the inhabitants of Britain were in a barbarous 
 •condition. 2. They were divided into a number of petty states, 
 independent of one another. 3. The manners and language of 
 ■the inha!)itants of the southern p»rts were similar to those of the 
 •Gauls. 4. Hence it was inferred that they w» re sprung from 
 that people. 5. They wtre as warlike as the Gauls, but less 
 •civilized. 6. Their religious superstitions in particular were 
 among the most bloody which have been known in any part of 
 the world. 7. The Druids, or priests, were venerated for the 
 strictness of their lives, and dreaded for the cruelty of their rites 
 ■and sacrifices. 
 
EXEftClSES. g8 
 
 vn. 
 
 fiPfm. 2. j^isum <^Llu;L6v^'QF,®Lauu^<s(§ (§ 63, c) 90 ^/rsrf? 
 
 iriT^fiffi^^Q^ ^Q^l_SOrSU^_^ UfKoSSshrQu^PT) U^[kj9^Q^frcSGTL^ 
 
 ^^S(^ <oT6oresrQuifli-6vrrui (§ 41) <oTesr(n7m. 4. ^^^^ 
 ^en&r e.Lo<ffi(^ otulj^l im^stQ^^t ^ul/^l Q<B-iLLU6V{TQLas^sr(7r^<sh-. 
 
 Quiuir ^ffl;6W63OT60)i_ cSlLQ^ ^Scuuj/rrMu Quiuirn-eay&tuaeb, 
 
 <SB!r^6aTL9s^^irsk. 8. ^L-Qssrujeu&srjB^Js^Qi^i—^SBruLSL^^^ ,slL 
 u^-BQ&ir^® QuitCu ■sQlLu.it m. 
 
 vni. 
 
 A few days later, fiudiiig his end approaching, this brave but 
 cruel monarch commanded that the gold, silver and jewels in 
 his treasury, with all the spoils and tropliies he had won, should 
 be placed before him. On these he long fixed his eyes and 
 burst into tears. The following day he ordered a review of his 
 army, his camels, horses, and elephants, with which having for 
 some time feasted his eyes from his magnificent throne, he burst 
 a second time into tears, and retired in dejection to his palace. 
 Out of his vast kingdom he bequeathed to his eldest son Masood 
 only the province called Persian Irak, and appointed his youngest 
 son Mahamad to rule over the rest. He died soon after, in the 
 sixty-third year of his age, and the thirty-fiflh of his reign, in 
 the year 1030. 
 
 IX. 
 
 uj/r« euiTip^0Q^_i^e6r. j^^^s'^QjF'S^'^^'k QsntL Qs^ireib^^ 
 ^j^jUi S-QeoiTU (^6m'(ip(ip&f&r ^(f^ j^sfi <ouj5^ Q<s®^^Q^eir ^ 
 QsFireveVy iriT^(^u^mriTaerr jfjQ^uui^QuJ&sr, Q£=nLD<g=iTLDir 
 Q<Ffr^eo^Q^(rt—isjQi^<oisr : — 
 
 Q^€sri^L-is;LQ6v LaQipfT^uiSlajQuieor^nh uCL-<omT^^0o 
 
 G * 
 
84 EXERCISES. 
 
 eu ij^^ La IT &pQ<S6reifrQ(Trf'(rf) 6uir^^<ss6oft((^^^tTeifr. ^(sv_^&(^ 
 Qeu(^ u&scru9 ijjs^Lh ^sk^0)j(Sf,'3=u:iurT^<s<a5 (o<su65sr(hiQLnsir&lp 
 ^6ro<F(i5@)6u L^ek (SUQ^SlfDUL^ ^(c6vir^<s<SG0irt^sir. tun; 
 
 QeiJSSsr(BlLD. s=LCiUir^^;S&s)^<SB ^sauufr/bp Cc<si;(S3?5r®Lb. <sbitlj 
 uiT fDjBs^sG)^ sSir^^LJsm&ssr (I<S}Jcm®Lh. sSl fir ^ ^ u ssansBofi sbt 
 
 QeusmQih, <sfrLJun'jh(W^ ^U'sSluld jSfr<3=LoiT(^LD. ■sQfr^^u&icr 
 
 ^jLCt '^eisr UQJ^La L^.Tm&SsfluJQplkj ^IT^^ILILD LD<5afl^(l^<SSC;^(S(T(o(Sfr 
 
 <SB(sir &.ev<s^^i(cev jS'SS)i~ui3®ssrL£iiJ(Si)iTh<S(3n-. ^(55)«5a5@)^'Lb 
 Qidick Qidg^K^ s^LDurr^^LJuQ^ Quuir<sQujGlLctsir(frf'(c6VfTQ^^,gs 
 
 An Official Letter. 
 
 Q^dr(^n),sbfT®sf-u[r ^sis^m &Q<oL^<kiLi—!T<snrr<s(e{riTQ[u (§ 17, c) 
 Qu^&v^fr ^frn^ un'smi-j[fl^<oa)jriueijiTS<5rT ^(Lps^^'S-^^. 
 
 Q^UL_L£)U/r U^ ffLlD SL. (fL<oT JBLdUfflso •3' fT ^ IT IT uS (f^ ^ S5 ^STSSST 
 
 L^iTisu^ S-<^^F(Sij <sn^^ Q<SFfT ^^ UTTiT^^rgsQsfTe^Qi—ssr. 
 
 ^^^^jfffrff}jjs[T3Seb 6S> Q^eu&u^rr&sTuSQF^^sQp^ jtj^eb @ 
 jr^dJr© Q^(Sij<dh^!T&5r^^<S(^LCi QajiTiBiu^an' 6ii<oiS)<sn'n' sfr Qufr 
 
 (olFn<k<S (SiJ([^LhuU^<S^tTir(T^'S''^LJa <SS00r'ffi(^ ^UJ[TjrTTS(!^<kQp^. 
 LC^pp ST Q^(Sn(d(U^n'<oSJ ^^'3o(^ 'SSeSSr<So<SfrS[TL£^6SQ^sQpUL^liSl(^ 
 
 Qeo ^TTLD &fT ^^'.TS&'^GTr ^<3'irfT(^LCiUL^ <ssscrL^LJUfTuj ^^^wm 
 
 <S^^^ ^^}JUL-fQ(Dpisk. ^^ <Flk]<S^ LD^^Sij Qcff'LU^ G)<Sfr<5m 
 
KEY TO THE EXERCISES. 
 
 I. 
 
 1. Inge vd,^ come here. 2. Varugiren, aiyd, I am coming, 
 8ir. 3. Un maganorfu Jcilda^ vara^ vendum, (you) must come 
 to^etlier with your son. 4. Avargaldi' ullo vara'^-c-collu, tell 
 lliem to come in. 5. Ipporudu varugira manklan hanahhan-d, 
 is the man who is coming now the accountant ? (§ 54). 6. Avan 
 iitgc viindd ponidu^^ (or fiddu) etiahku elldm ron/idn, when he 
 ramc here, he related all to me. 7. Qlmdiyil^-irundu nerdy 
 vnddij-d, did you come direct from' Europe (or from abroad) ? 
 ^. En kai-k-h'd^ kondu vd, bring my walking-stick {lit. having 
 taken my hand-stick, come). 9. Palli-k-kudaifukku vdrtingal,^ 
 ■liijd, come to the school, sir. 10. VlttuM-u-p-po, go home. 
 
 II. 
 
 1. {Bi£sx\ Sir) kadavu tira.^ 2. Q/FeLxsuu&us^isirLJuiTQ^rkj-s&r 
 nel-vayalga I i i-jy-pdruiigal . 3. ^■S6)eu^(rm- us^'SOLnuu'j[!^c(^-k(^j^ 
 av'iigal parumi"ii-y-dy^ irnkkuduJ 4. (Suir<osrLh (or ^\.<si s'ld) 
 jisvLn[r'd^(j^kS/D^ vunam (or dgdram) nllam-dy irukhiradu. 
 
 * Vd is the 2n(l .'^in^ular inxperativo of variiijiren, "Icome" (see 
 §39); ingu, " here " + e particle of ein))hasis = i/i/e. 
 
 b Kudu ji^ovcriis the 3rd or iubtr. case in 6du (§ 52). 
 
 c Vara is the infinitive of varugiren (p. 49, no. 17). 
 
 *i Lit. "• he here eouie time," vanda being the rel. pa. p. of vckrugiten, 
 Cjualifvidg porudu. 
 
 e rfiwcii - Skt. sima, "boundary or limit." In colloquial Tamil it 
 means "country," " empire," or "Europe." 
 
 f Kol for koliii : neuter nouns do not, as a rule, take the accusatire 
 ending; tow^/u = gerund of A:o/, "to take." 
 
 S Variiugal = po\ite imperative of va i§ 39). 
 
 ^ Kadavu for ace. kadanii. (see Exer. I., note f). 
 
 > Sec ptiras. 51, h, and 62, a. 
 
 i Corrupt form for irnkkiradu, 3rd singular neuter present of iru, " to 
 be." Colloquially, a singular neuter verb is used with a plural neuter 
 nominative as here. 
 
86. KEY TO THE EXERCISES. 
 
 5. (oT/E-sefr Q^iTL-i—^^iQ&o Lnrribs^'ssirr® engal tdttaitil-e^ ma^ 
 raiigal undu. 6. ^m>(Sij&m LEiffib<B-mGo<sy) avdigal marangal 
 alia (§ 47, g). 7. Qisu^'SB'Sfrir'Bsar^sk.LJL^Q vdldi-k-kdrandi-k- 
 hilppidu. 8. 'cJssr,fB(^&Q-sn'(^<FLD ^'skr(SSsfiT<sQsn ® enakJcii-k- 
 honjam tannlr-Tc-hodu. 9. (sr-sk QlLi— ^iS^soafrfleiiSou en hitta 
 tanmr illdi (lit. there is no water near me). 10. <o\&sr iss)£5<s&r 
 &(Lp<su Qeu0hr(SlLa en hai-gal Tcaruva vendum. 
 
 III. 
 
 1. Ndngal Qema^ppattanathihhu-p-pdga vendum, we must go- 
 to Madras. ^^ 2. Inda-v-uril^ canangal ettandi, what (is) the 
 population of this village ? 3. Inge irundu a-p-pattanaitiilcliii 
 e-vv-alavu tilram, what (is) the distance from here to that town? 
 4. Enakku't-teriyddu, I do not know (lit. it is not known to 
 me). 6. Varlyil-e eddvadu abdyam und'd, is there any danger 
 on the road? 6. Ndm piraydna7)i pdvum, vd, come, let us go- 
 on the journey {lit. we^^ shall go, &c.). 7. ^dm IcaddiJcku-p- 
 pOy koiijam ariri, ney, karl, mardldi vdiiguvom, let us go to the 
 bazaar and buy some rice, ghee, and curry- stuff {lit. having 
 gone to the bazaar, we^^ shall. &c.). 8. Verfenna vdi'iga venum^ 
 what else^ need*" we buy ? 9. Nel-vayalgalil-e odugira periya 
 ydndigaldi nokki pdrungal, please looks and see the big ele- 
 phants that run in the rice-fields. 10. Ydndiyin tumhi-k-kdi 
 migavum valiyadu, the elephant's trunk is very strong. 
 
 IV. 
 
 1. GTssJLuir'BsGr ^^i^&(^m^^Qeo jerrCvL-fr^LD ^erf^sQrn^. 
 
 iSaJo^sii'Si^La QussBT LSl&T'^r^(ef^Lh QunQ((rfrr&Q<sn-sisr^ uirir. 
 
 a « is added to the locative for the sake of emphasis, 
 
 b Qenna-p-pattanam = Tamil name for Madras. Poga = infinitiye (of 
 Tpo, " go") depending upon vendum. 
 
 •- Inda-v-iiril : r is a euphonic insertion. 
 
 <' Observe the use of 'itdm here and nangal in sentence no. 1 (of. p.. 30). 
 
 «? Vefeijna — veru-^cnna (§ 12, i. a). 
 
 ' Veiiwii corrupt form of vendum. 
 
 S NolcM pd>-vn'jal = iit. "having looked, (please) see." 
 
 h Aii-filldi<j(il=iit. "male ch;ldjen," but generally "persons of the 
 male sex," jusr. as pen-pi!ldigal = '' persons of the female sex," i.e. 
 " women." 
 
KEY TO THE EXERCISES. 87 
 
 ULj Lf/DLJUtLi—rresr . 6. (SUL^'iiSQevfTiT^sinLi^Qeo ^(Sv s^i oOl-UJ 
 
 Q U J (J^^^FfT Q iU &b so IT LT, <S3h m IT U^^ ^UUfiSl 3^^ sQ <SfTSm L-.[T iT<ss<siT,, 
 7. L9iOTL/ ^(l^eUQ^ih '3^^^.JinTiL^^ <SIEJSm e^© (SU^^ Q<3=TT^ 
 
 sifTiTSiSfr. 8. <oT£?t8oqt Q(su(^ jBfTsfrrTiiiurSljh^eu'BoSTLjQufTeo (ou 
 ^<^-sk. 9. ^irQjBpj^&TTGoQu^ euTT^Q-^iTsk'onff u^isi^.^sSuQun 
 ^!k]Q<fS eu^^Q^sQ^^-esT, 10. /5<Tfk}<sm e^Q^ ir^iT^La sv&?)!inSl&> 
 SfT^^i^&^fB-'ESn-t-.ir^, ji /5(T'bsn >i s^.'S'SireoCnLn ^m)^uu^}]L.iu 
 
 V. 
 
 1. However foolish one may be, if he were to continue reading 
 ever so little (it may bo) every day, he will in the end improve 
 his learning, as the saying is "a stone becomes hollowed by the- 
 crawling of ants." 2. Let the tone of your voice be the same- 
 in Kiading as it is in speaking (lit. when speaking, what sort 
 your voice is, let it be that sort, when you read). 3. If you- 
 meet with a word you do not know, do not simply think that it 
 may have such (a meaning). 4. Having spelt it first, if you (still) 
 do not know, (then) ask your teacher. 5. '' And seeing the 
 multitudes, he went up into a mountain ; and when he was set,, 
 his disciples came unto him." G. " When he was come down 
 froui the mountain, great multitudes followed him." 7. Thett 
 " tliere came a leper and worshipped him (by falling before him) 
 saying, * Lord, if thou wilt, thou canst make me clean.' " 8. All 
 the members of a family elected the bravest and the most intelli- 
 gent amongst them as their head. 
 
 VI. 
 
 1. ^SBSfTeo^^eo LSjS^^esofis (§ui&&t ^u.^^eor€a)LauS6& 
 
 (T^J^^ITfrSfifT. 2. ^eU!T<Sm ^(ff)6iJ(f^-BQ<!ElTQT)QJIT,FLaU^;gUUl^(r 
 
 L06U ujhuso ^jb/D jrJir&<SB<c!rriTLiuLSl(flji^i(f}^i3^^triT<sm. S.Q^e^ir 
 
 (Gaul) {S^s=^^iT(if)kQs!T^^({f,%^^. 4. ^m^ujiTeo ^<s^i'r<s&r 
 
 * Notathe use of the gerund in this sentence (§ 31, ii. c). 
 ^ Lit. " having becom'e poor men." 
 
 c Tenri(;aiyil = ten + tigdiyil^ '* in the southern part " {n+ t = ntf. 
 § 12, viii.). 
 
S^ KEY TO THE EXERCISES. 
 
 ^ s" rr eS <ss £{r iruSl ((^ ^ ^ IT IT <B !sir . 6. ^<su/r<5(er55D)L_(ij Q<su^^^^'k(§ 
 Siu ^L-U^^csQmrr ^Qeo[T<B^^iQm s^^66),3'u^m^LCi (§ 53) 
 
 .efr&s)<sU'SmiTii9(T^i5^s6r. 7. ^^sSl^fr (Druids) <5\^^^!b(^,^k 
 ^m (§ 17, c) ^iba!^<dS)L.uj (p. 34) (a^LL9/n> <ajn-Lei«<a5)«5(iSl^'i>-o/r) 
 
 VII. 
 
 1. In a certain village (o?- icnl) (ihere) lived a koniutti (a 
 iirader of tiie Banian ca>te), possessing some money. 2. One 
 .night a thief entered his honse for the purpose of stealing, and 
 liid himself in the loft. 3. The komutti having become aware 
 of this (fact) looked at his wile and said, "Where is our infant 
 ■cldld '^ Whai name may we give it?'' 4. To this she 
 replied, " You may do (i.e. give) what (name) you please " 
 (lit. to you wiiat way the mind is, ihat way you may do). 
 -5. " Then we will give (it) the name of Verigade9an." So 
 -saying, he bawled out loudly [the name] Veiigade^'a. 6. This 
 Jiame being (also) the name of the police-officer (who lived) in 
 the adjoining house, as soon as he heard his name, took his 
 -arms, and coming into his (i.e. the trader's) house, asked, *' Why 
 did you call for me ? " 7. The Banian by beckoning in- 
 timated to the police-officer the fact that the thief was in the loft. 
 «8. He at once caught the thief, bound him and took him away. 
 
 VIII. 
 
 •&sm® cgsk <s iofj- ^ ^nu i3 ^ <o^ I'J^ ji- ,<if Qua sir Qsijm<orPi ji^^S6rihm 
 
 a See para. 46. 
 
 « For uyir {v being a euphonic insertion). 
 
 * K^OiVuriyavandan^ from ^"kt. <;auryavanta (strong form), " valiant.' 
 
KEY TO THE EXERCISES. 89 
 
 i5iT<s(T pssr U€OL-<s&r c^iLL-^ihsm (§^l€G)ir<EB<s(r lUfr'Bsor^Em @66)su 
 
 LD^lUU^lLjISJ ^S6Sr<SS^^^IT^^ sSl <B= SOT ^Q ^ IT Q ^ [T La'Bsoi uSl &b 
 
 Quirdj ^^euirm ^sor inrs=9uj^^(srr Quir&ajrrdr ii3 ir it ssQ £5 sir 
 
 (§&Q'BtT(Si^^ sSlilQ ^iiin> irirs=9luj^60)^ujii(^Lhuu^ (§ 63, c) 
 ii9^ ujrS)Lnfr IT i^Sliu Lt^<SLCiQ^ebru(sn'^ i§(Uu9^^<F<SFpj)j G/sjr^ 
 ^i^uSiT sSiLi^iTeor. j^CsQuiT^^ Q<su^^rS(^euuj^^u^^ ^ek 
 
 J)JLD ULLL-LDlTS^t-eur[^(Si^La (LfSUU^eO^ ^ ^ LatrQuj ^fE.ld LD 
 
 .,j^&s6n—iTLh.**- 
 
 IX. 
 
 In a certain forest dwelt in very close friendship a lion and 
 an ox. A backbiting (h')l-\-Qolludal) and covetous fox having 
 <5ome, destroyed that Iriondship. When he (i.e. Somasarma) 
 said so, (and) the princes asked,t> "How (was) that?" Soma- 
 sarma proceeded to relate (llu; story). 
 
 in a certain town named (ennum^ § 17, c) Mahirariippiyam, 
 in the Southern country, ilieie lived a merchant named {enra, 
 rel. part.) Vardhamana. Although he had much wealth (§ 46), 
 yet, owing to his dt-sire {drdiyindl) that he should gain more, 
 he began to think (dldrikkal + dndn) as follows: " Whatever is 
 difficult to be acquired must be acquired. Whatever is acquired 
 must be taken care of. Whatever is taken care of must be 
 increased. Whatever is increased must be enjoyed by one's- 
 self, and be spent upon persons worthy of receiving gifts 
 (uttama pdttirattil). The substance which is not taken care of 
 will be destroyed. Whatever is not increased (by industry) 
 becomes less. It is said in the S'astras that (the wealth) which 
 is not spent for one's own use, and for the use of others who 
 are worthy of receiving boons, is wasted. Further, who possesses 
 pleasure, merit, reputation, greatness among men, (extensive) 
 friendship, power of accomplishing what was determined ? 
 These are only po.-^sessed by those who have treasured up riches 
 (lit. money). Those who are destitute (of riches) are in 
 the eyes of the public like corpses in motion (tit. will become 
 
 • Andu + dm {for dgum), 
 
 *> The iniinitives folla and ena are used to express time (§ 63, a). 
 
90 KEY TO THE EXERCISES. 
 
 walking corpses in the world). It is therefore expedient tr 
 increase one's property." Having contemplated the mattev 
 thus, he laid on his cart the articles of merchandise which he 
 had in his possession, tied to the yoke his two oxen, named*- 
 Sanjivaka and Nandaka, and went abroad driving (his cart). 
 
 X. 
 
 To Mr. George Banbury, 
 
 Acting Collector^ of the South Arcot District (Ten -^-Atltddu-}- 
 Quid). 
 
 Letter (or petition) written by S'rinivasa Ayyaiigar, Acting 
 Tahsildarc of Tindivanam Taluq, dated Head Quarters, on the 
 19th October 1865. 
 
 I have received and perused (your) 2nd Order No. 37, issued 
 on the 30th of September last (calling attention) to your first 
 order to receive and despatch the accounts from the Managers 
 of the Temples (to enable you) to grant Inani (lands) in lieu of 
 paying ready money (for the support) of the temples. 
 
 There are nine temples in this Taluq. The accounts of two 
 of these temples, and those of some Yomiyadars and other 
 persons amounting to six individuals, to whom the allowance is 
 paid in cash, have been prepared. But the accounts of the 
 remaining seven temples are not ready yet. I have issued strict 
 orders to the Managers of the Temples to appear (before me). 
 I beg to informal you that I will have these accounts prepared as 
 early as possible, and send them to you. 
 
 Your obedient (servant). 
 
 * Peyardi, "name," ace. governed by uddiya, "possessing," 
 ^ Avargal, honorific plural, 
 c Title of officer in charge of a Tuluq. 
 
 d Id/u fangadi manuvii feydu konden, I kave made this matter (the 
 Bubject of) the petition. 
 
Part III, 
 
 Tamil-English Vocabulary.* 
 
 The words are here arranged according to the English alpha- 
 betic order for easy reference; but the student should learn 
 to use the Tamil dictionary where the words follow the Tamil 
 alphabet. The following contractions are employed: — 
 
 str = rerbs of the strong conjugation, f 28a and { 28 (1). 
 
 w = the weak conjugation, as ney, p. 45 or en, p. 46. 
 
 m = the middle conjugation, as pei-ii, p. 46. 
 
 sm = verbs with strong and middle formg, as nada, p. 46, 
 
 wm^ those with weak and middle forms, as per, p. 46. 
 
 ir = irregular weak verbs, p. 47. 
 
 V ■» verb; n - noun. 
 
 A (agiren or agugiren, anen or 
 ayinen or ilginen, aven or 
 aguven, aga), to become. 
 
 abagari (abagarikkireu, etc.), 
 str., to (if fraud, plunder. 
 
 abattu, calaniiti/. 
 
 abayam, mi.'ifortune, danger. 
 
 abippiniyaii) , intention. 
 
 ai;ili, wnt., to tremble, to move', 
 
 a(;ai, n., desire, [str., to shake. 
 
 a^anam, seat. 
 
 a9ar, presence, appearance. 
 
 a^firam, observance, rite. 
 
 avattai, neglect, disregard. 
 
 avattiii-pannu, m., to neglect. 
 
 accam, /Va?-, dread. 
 
 accu, type. 
 
 acc'adi ( = accu + a(Jikkireii, 
 etc.), str., to print. 
 
 adagu, a pledge, vegetables. 
 
 m\&\, garment; cream. 
 
 adai, wm., to attain to. [enclose. 
 
 adai, sir., to shut, block up, 
 
 adai, str., to rebound, to swell. 
 
 adaie:ai. attainment. 
 
 adaikkalam, refuge, 
 adiiippu, obstruction. 
 adaiyalam, a sign^ a mark, 
 adaiyalam po^u, ir., to mark. 
 adakku m., to subdue, restrain, 
 
 conceal. 
 adakki-p-podu, ir., to repress, 
 adakku, n., restraint. 
 adalal, therefore. 
 adahgal, the contents. 
 adangu, rn., to obey, submit. 
 adaram, support. 
 adarnda, dense, thick. 
 adarttiyay ^n-op. adarcciyay, 
 
 adv., close. 
 aglaru (-giren, adarnden, -veji, 
 
 adara), wm., to be close 
 adayam, gain. [together, 
 
 adi (-kkiren, «(c.), str., to beat. 
 adi, a blow, a stroke ; source. 
 
 adi, beginning. {bottom, 
 
 adi, July -August. 
 adi^ayam, wonder, 
 agli-c-cuvadu, footstep, 
 adigam, much. 
 
 * For EnglUh-Tamil Vocabulary (alphabetical), see Tamil SBiiF-TAUOHT, 
 
^2 
 
 ADI 
 
 adiga-p-periya, very greats vast. 
 adiga-p-piraga9amana, vivid. 
 adigaram, chapter; authority. 
 adigarau-Qey, w., to rule. 
 adigara-p-pattiram, a jjower 
 
 of attorney. 
 adigari, sir., to increase. 
 Adiga-viliii podu, ir., to over- 
 adikkadi, often. [charge. 
 
 adilirundu, thence. 
 adimai, slavery. 
 adipati, lordy ruler, 
 adir, wm,^ to tremble. 
 adi-t-talam, ground floor ; 
 adu, ir., to cook, [foundation. 
 adii, str.^ to approach, be near, 
 adu, a sheep, [be suitable to. 
 adu, m., to dance. 
 adukku w., to pile up, pack. 
 adu-madu, cattle. [cattle. 
 
 adu-madu mey, str., to tend 
 adu-mudal (adatku piabu), 
 
 ^since, thereafter. 
 acluppu, fireplace, hearth. 
 agaQam, sky. [cunning. 
 
 agada-vigadam, treachery, 
 agalam, breadth, width. 
 agalamana, broad. 
 agandai, presumption, pride. 
 agappadu, ir., to be obtained, 
 
 to become subordinate. 
 agu, to become. (See a.) 
 agulam, confusion, noise. 
 aikkiyam, union, aggregate. 
 aippa9i, October- November. 
 aiya, sir. 
 aiyo, alas! 
 akkal, elder sister. 
 akkam, grain ; side. 
 akkam, increase, wealth, [come. 
 akku, m.y to make, cause to be- 
 
 AND 
 
 al, w., to rule. 
 ai, person {fern, a-tti). 
 aja, sm., to measure. 
 alagu, blade. 
 
 alai, wm., to wander ; be tossed 
 about; str., to disturb, 
 alai, a wave. [shake. 
 
 alam, a plough 
 alam, salt-pan. 
 alangaram, ornament. 
 alavangu, a crow-bar. 
 alavu, measure, quantity. 
 aii, str., to bestow. 
 aila (§ 4:1 g), not. 
 allamal, besides. [night. 
 
 al-l-um pagal-um, day and 
 al69anai, consultation, deliber- 
 tion. [take counsel. 
 
 alo9i, str., to consult, think, 
 aluval, business. 
 amai, wm., to yield, agree. 
 amiiidi, quietitcss. 
 ambattan barber. 
 amir, wm., to siyik. 
 amma, ammal, madam, 
 ammiii, small- pox. [motlier. 
 amukku, ?»., to press. 
 ail, male. 
 a 11 a, anna. 
 
 aniii, oath; iinvii, a7i elejdiant. 
 aiiaiyidu, ir., 9attiyam pannu, 
 anal, if. [m., to swear. 
 
 anal-ulla, warm. 
 analum (§46), although, yet. 
 anbu, love. 
 anda (§47b), that. 
 andai, side, vicinity. 
 andai, owl. 
 
 andaiyil, near at hand. 
 andarangam, privacy, secrecy, 
 a^davan, lord, master. 
 
AND 
 
 andi, eveyihuj. 
 andu, a year. 
 anega, many. 
 angapadi, stirrup. 
 arigriram, pri(U'. 
 ange, there. [breadth, inch. 
 angulam, a finger, Jinyer's 
 ani, a screw, nail, pin. 
 aui, June- July. 
 anidiyulla, unjust. 
 anil, a squirrel. [tice. 
 
 aniyayam, unfairness, injus- 
 afijal, afiju, re rerence, fearing. 
 anmiii, inanliness. 
 aiiiiam, food. 
 annaii, elder brother. 
 afinaiiam, ii/norance. 
 aniirii;i-p-param , pineapple. 
 anniya, different, stranye. 
 an pauri, a boar. 
 an pillai, a male child, man. 
 anri, except. 
 anrn, then, that day. 
 anrniinidal, thenceforth. 
 anubavi, sir., to enjoy. 
 anuniadi, assent, command 
 anunirinani, doubt, suspicion. 
 anuppu, m., to send. 
 apiyu, office, 
 
 appadi, in that manner, so. 
 appal further, beyond, [ence. 
 appiyayam, practice, experi- 
 appiyac;am pai.inu, m., to prac- 
 appodii, then. \tise. 
 
 ar or yar, (p. 34) who. 
 'ara^u, a kiny. 
 aragu, prettiness, beauty, 
 arai, half 
 
 arai (1) v., wm., to smite, 
 strike (2) n., a slap, blow. 
 ariii, room, cell, cavern. 
 
 95 
 
 ARU 
 
 arai .s^?-., to yrind. [troduce. 
 arai str., to call, invite, in- 
 arai-met kattu, ceiliny. 
 araippi, str., to cause to invite,. 
 
 to send for, to summon 
 arakku, redness, lac, wax; 
 arai, Jire, heat. [arrack.. 
 
 aralu, w,, to bum. 
 aram, file, rasp. 
 aram, virtue. 
 aram, dejJth. 
 aramana, deep. 
 ara'-manai, palace. 
 aram-atta, shallow. 
 arambam, commencement. 
 aran, beauty ; fortification, 
 aravadu, somebody, [citadel. 
 ari, ivm., to know, recognize. 
 ari, wm., to perish; str., to 
 
 destroy. 
 ari, wm. , to gnaw, nibble ; cut off. 
 ari9i, rice. 
 
 arikkili, notice, information. 
 arival, a sickle. 
 arivi, str., to i^iform, publish. 
 arivippu, arivittal, notice, 
 arivu, knowledge. 
 arivu, destruction. 
 arji, reportf petition. 
 arttam, n., meaning. 
 aru, ir., cease; str., to cut, reap^ 
 aru, way ; river ; six. 
 aru, m., to abate ; to cool. 
 aru, w., to weep. 
 arubadu, sixty, 
 arudi, end. 
 aruge, adv., near 
 arugiya, putrid. 
 arugu, neighbourhood. 
 aragu, ?/t., to ji^itfefy. 
 arukku, dirt, filth. 
 
94 
 
 ARU 
 
 arul, grace. [cllfflcultij. 
 
 arumiii, rarity, costliness, 
 arunadam, lord of grace. 
 aruppii, reaping, liar vest. 
 am u oday am , sunrise. 
 aruvi, icaterfall. 
 astamanam, sunset. 
 asti, estate, riches. 
 astivaram, foundation. 
 atcebam, censure, objection. 
 atci, jiossession ; lordship. 
 atpam, mean, trivial. 
 attatci ; proof. 
 attavanai, register, index. 
 iltt'iraicci, mutton. 
 attu, m., to assuage, cornfort, 
 attuk-kutti, lawb. [soothe. 
 attuma, the soul; a living being. 
 avabatti, impiety, profaidty. 
 ava^iyani, necessity, urgency. 
 avadu, either; or. 
 aval (§16b), she. 
 iivalatcai.iamaiia, ugly. 
 iivamanam ; nindai, disgrace, 
 avan (§16b), he. [ijisult. 
 
 ava-nambikkai, distrust. 
 a vani , A ug ust- September. 
 avayavam, limb, member. 
 avir, str., to loose, untie, undo. 
 aviri, indigo. 
 ayattam, readiness. 
 ayatta-p-paduttu, m., to pre- 
 ayu ; ayu^u, age. [pare. 
 
 ayudam, weapon ; tool. 
 
 Ca (p. 49), to die. [prayer. 
 ^abam, n., recitation of a 
 ^abida, list, catalogue. 
 ^adai, flesh. 
 
 9adanam, a bond, effort,means. 
 -Qadangu, a ceremony. 
 
 gAN 
 
 9adar, issue, j/romulgation. 
 
 9adi, caste. 
 
 9adi, str., to assert, maintain. 
 
 ^adidi, suddenness. 
 
 ^adi-k-kay, nutmeg. 
 
 9adi-pattiri, 7nace. 
 
 9ad u V ana , ta m e ; g en tie . 
 
 9agala, all, 
 
 9agodaran, brother. 
 
 9agodari, sister. 
 
 9aigai, beckoning, signal. 
 
 9akkiradai, diligence, activity. 
 
 9akku, pouch ; sack. 
 
 9alai, hall. 
 
 9alladai, a sieve. 
 
 9amridanam, peace. 
 
 9aniaii, goods, furniture. 
 
 9amanam , si)n ila rity , equal ity . 
 
 9amanana, adj., even. 
 
 9amai'ttiyam, skill, e.i-pertness. 
 
 9ambadi, str., to acquire, earn. 
 
 9ambalam, salary. 
 
 9ambandam, connection. 
 
 9ami, str., to digest. 
 
 9amiy fimai , ind itfestion. 
 
 9ammatti, a sledge-hammer, 
 
 9amugam, presence. 
 
 9amukkalam, carpet. 
 
 9amu9aram, family. 
 
 (^2Lm\ii}'Ai'i, family -man, farmer. 
 
 9aii, a span. 
 
 9aiiai, a grindstone. 
 
 9anal, hernp. 
 
 9anam, people. 
 
 9andai, a market. 
 
 9andai, strife, quarrel. 
 
 9aiidai 9ey, iv.,tofight, quarrel. 
 
 9andam, mildness. 
 
 9andana-maram, sandalirood. 
 
 9andegam, doubt. 
 
 9andega-p-padu, ir., to suspect. 
 
gAN 
 
 ^andi, str., to meet^ visit, 
 -9andi, tuHiyht. 
 ^andosham, cheerfuhiesSf joy. 
 ^angadi, events ap'air. 
 yangldam, soiig, music, 
 •^angili, a chain. 
 ^ani-k-kiiainai, Saturday. 
 -9anmargam, vioiaUty. 
 •^aiinal, window. 
 ^anniyayi, an ascetic. 
 ■^appfulu, food. 
 ^appani, a c ripple, 
 9appattu, shots. 
 ■9appattu arjii, dining-room. 
 ^appattu var, shoelace. 
 ^appidu, ir.y to eat, 
 9ara<;ari, areraye. 
 ^aradii, thread, wire. 
 ^*arakku, yoods, 
 ^aram, sap. 
 
 -yarayam, arrack; spirits. 
 9ari, riyht, e.cactness ; v. wni.y 
 
 to sl'ale, slip. 
 9aripptj4>ii^tn, w., to rectify. 
 ^arirain, hody. 
 ^arivana, steep. 
 ^arkkar, yovernnie)it. 
 •9arkkarai, snyar. [ness. 
 
 ^at9i, evide)ice, testimony, wit- 
 9at9i-k-karau, a witness. 
 9at9i 90IIU, m., to bear evidence, 
 9attai, a vest, coat, [to witness. 
 9attam, a frame, rule, law. 
 9attam, voice, noise. 
 9attam podu, ir., to shout. 
 9attamay {or -aga), aloud. 
 9atti, a pan. 
 9attu, little, somewhat. 
 •9atiippu, marshiness, 
 ^avagari, a banker. 
 ;aY-v-ai"i9i, sayo. 
 
 96 
 
 giM 
 
 9avara-k-katti, razor. 
 
 9a var am, shaving 
 
 9avi, a key. 
 
 9avukkaram, soap, 
 
 9avukku a whip, 
 
 Qedam, damage. 
 
 9edi, shrub, bush, 
 
 9el, w., to go, pass. ' 
 
 9elavari (-kkiren, dc), str., to 
 
 9elavu, expense. [spmd. 
 
 9elai, cloth (ofanative uumtan). 
 
 9eluttii, )//., to cause to go, to 
 
 expend. 
 9emmriu, a shoetnaker, 
 yen am, a saddle. 
 yengal, a brick. 
 9er, wm., to join; to arrive at, 
 cer, str., to cidlect, to accumu- 
 yeri, str., to thrive. [late 
 
 9evipp'illada, barren, 
 Qerippu, fertility. 
 yeripp'ulla, fertile, 
 yerii, mud. 
 yeriippu, sandals. 
 yettu-p-po, to die of, 
 yeval, a cock. 
 Qevi, ear. 
 9evidu , deafness. 
 9evvayk-kiramai, Tuesday. 
 9ey (-gireu, -deii, -ven, -ya), to 
 9eydi, a deed ; news. [do, 
 
 9eygai, an act. 
 yeyyul, poetry. 
 9idaru, m., to scatter. 
 9lkkiram, quickness. 
 9ikkiramaua, quick. 
 9lkkirama3^ quickly. 
 9ila, few, some. 
 9ilaiidi, spider. 
 yilvauam, an odd number, [try, 
 9imai, boundary, foreign coun- 
 
96 
 
 / giM 
 
 ^imma9anam, a tJirone. 
 
 ^indi, str., to think. 
 
 9iiidu, VI., to sjrill, to shed. 
 
 9iiiegam, friendship, affection. 
 
 ^inegidan, frisnd. 
 
 9ingam, lion. 
 
 9ini , siKja r ; saddle. 
 
 ^inua, small, little, 
 
 ^inuavaii, a lad. 
 
 9ippi, a shell- fish. 
 
 9lppu, a comb. 
 
 9iragu, iviiir/. 
 
 9ira, sm., to be elegant. 
 
 9iran jiva, '^live long!" (a form 
 
 of polite address). 
 9iri, str., to laugh. 
 9iru, little, small (9ittu, before 
 9irumai, smallness. [avoivel). 
 9iru pen, a girl. 
 9islian, a pupil. 
 9ittam, icill. 
 9itti, success. 
 9ittirai, April-May. 
 9ittiram, a picture, an orna- 
 9ittii, see Qiru. [ment. 
 
 9ittii, note, rereipt, ticket. 
 9ivanam, livelihood. 
 9ivappana, red. 
 9ivi, str., to live. 
 91VU, 7n., to pare off, shave, 
 9lvuli, a plane. [slice. 
 
 9odu, couple, shoes (of a native). 
 9okkattan, draur/htSj chess. 
 90I (p. 51, No. 38), to say, tell. 
 9olai, a grove, forest. 
 9olaiii, maize. 
 9ombal, idleness. 
 9onda; 9ondamriiia, own. 
 ^ondakkaran, owner. 
 cori, 7vm., to flow down. 
 9ori, itching, scurvy. 
 
 guv 
 
 9or, wm., to languish, to fail* 
 
 9 or II, j>ith : boiled nee. 
 
 9U(laua, Jtot. 
 
 9ude9i, native. 
 
 9udu (p. 47), to burn. 
 
 9udu, heat. 
 
 9Ugam, health. 
 
 9Ugamay, safely. 
 
 9Ugappadu,ir., to recover ( from- 
 illness j. [heal. 
 
 9ugappaduttu, ?w., to cure; ta 
 
 9ulagu, a winnowiufi fan,sieve^ 
 
 9ulai, kiln. 
 
 9uma, sm., to bear. 
 
 9umai, a load. 
 
 9umaikaran, a porter. 
 
 9umandu p6, to carry away. 
 
 9umma, simply, without rea- 
 
 9undeli, mouse. [son^ 
 
 9ungam, tax. 
 
 9unnambu, lime, 
 
 9ura, around. 
 
 9uraudu, m., to scrape. 
 
 9urangam, a mine, tunnel, 
 
 9uriyan, sun. 
 
 9uru 9uriippay, diligently. 
 
 9uru 9uriippii, industry. 
 
 9uru k ku, quickness. 
 
 9iirukkii, a noose. 
 
 9urul, a roll. 
 
 9urungu, m., to shrink. 
 
 9uttam, purity. 
 
 9uttamana, clean. 
 
 9utti 9ura, around. 
 
 9uttii, m., to point out. 
 
 9uttiram, engine, machine. 
 
 9uttiyal, a hammer. 
 
 9uttu, n., circuit; v.m., to re- 
 volve, wrap. 
 
 9uva9am, breath. 
 
 9uvar, wall. 
 
97 
 
 EGA 
 
 (For words etymologically beginning 
 with i), see under T.] 
 
 Ec^amaii, niastar, 
 €(;amrm i , in istress. 
 ■edTivadu, soHictlnntj, n'/iatever. 
 «dir, wm., to come in front ; 
 
 sir., to ojipose. 
 •edirilli, o/ipomnit, accused. 
 "cdo ; edavadu, mnnethinti. 
 edii (p. 84), u'hiclt. 
 €<Ui, str., tn tnlce up; to uncover. 
 e(Uittu-p-p6(lii, /■/•., toreinove. 
 «lada ; taii^ada, ini/if. 
 oUiii, limit. 
 
 •ellani; ellaruin (p. 87), all. 
 eli, a rat. 
 -elumbu, a hone. 
 -en, w., to sai/, name, 
 -en, u'ltf/ 
 ei.ibadu, njltty. 
 end a (^17), nliich? 
 cndiram, a mill. [where. 
 
 enge [engu + ej ; evvidattil, 
 •enue-y- agilum, wJierever. 
 •enge -y- 6, somewhere. 
 eng'irundu, whence. [out. 
 eng'um, ever tf where, throwjh- 
 •eng'um uUa. universal. 
 enna ; ennam ; eduvo, wJiat. 
 ei.n.iam, notion. 
 eunattnkkaga, wherefore. 
 ^i.ii.iey, oil (fr. el and ney, 
 
 raju'-seed oil). 
 ■enney vilakkn, oil-lamp. 
 ei.ii.iiranda, innumerable. 
 ' -ennu, m., to rerhm, count. 
 ■enru ; ena (^6o), that. 
 eppadi, how. 
 
 ■eppadi-y-avadu, someliow. 
 eppodu ; epuorudn, when. 
 epporud'amilinn, wJienever. 
 
 Tamil Grammar S.-T. 
 
 IDI 
 
 epporud'um, alirai/s. 
 
 ei'i, n., fire; v.woi., to burn; 
 
 str., to kindle, consume. 
 eri, ivm., to throw. 
 eri, a lake. 
 
 eru, Win., to rise, ascend. 
 eru, seven. 
 
 eri\,in., to mount, climb, ascend 
 erudu, m., to write. 
 erudu, a bitllock. 
 erumiii, a buffalo 
 erumbu, an ant. 
 erumbu, ni., to rise. 
 eruppu, m., to awake, rouse. 
 eruttu, letter, writing. 
 eruttu-k-kuttu, m., to join 
 
 letters, spell. 
 etpadu, ir., to undertake. 
 etta {p.p. of el) i Jit. 
 ettanai, how many • 
 ettu, n., eit/ht ; v.m., to reach. 
 ettu, m., to raise, load. 
 ettu-k-kol, to receive, accept ; 
 evividUjir.. to e.vcite.[welrinne. 
 evu, ni., to mye. 
 evvalavu, how much I 
 evvaiav'um, how inuch soever, 
 
 I, n., a jiy ; wm., to give 
 iQiii, 71., assent, harmony; v. 
 
 wm., to join, ayrce. 
 idaiveli, vacancy. 
 idaiyiie ger, str., to insert. 
 idaiyuru, impediment, mis- 
 idadu, left side. [fortune. 
 
 idam, position, place, left side. 
 idan kodu, str.. to yield, allow. 
 i^i, wm., to fall to pieces; str., 
 
 to pound. 
 idi; idimurakkam, thunder. 
 idinal, hereby. 
 
98 
 
 IDU 
 
 idu, ir, to put, give. 
 
 idu (p. 34), this. 
 
 Idu, equivalent. 
 
 idukkam, narrowness. 
 
 idukki, pincers. 
 
 idumudal ; inimel, henceforth, 
 hereafter. 
 
 iduppu, the hip. 
 
 igiii, a gift: 
 
 igal (igalu), icm., to hate, op- 
 pose, [reproach. 
 
 igar (igaru), wm., to despise, 
 
 ila, young, tender. 
 
 iiabam, n., profit. 
 
 ilai9U, that which is tender; 
 lightness, min uteness. 
 
 ilagu, m., to relax. 
 
 iliii, a leaf. 
 
 iliii, str., to tire. 
 
 ilaikkari, vegetable curry. 
 
 ilaipparu, w., to rest. 
 
 iliiipparudal, v.n., rest. 
 
 ilaippattu, ?«., to refresh (one's- 
 
 iiiiippu, v.n., fatigue, [self). 
 
 iiiiiya, young. 
 
 iiaiyaval, younger woman. 
 
 ilaiyavan, younger man. 
 
 iiakkam, number. 
 
 ilakkanam, grammar. 
 
 ilatcam, a hundred thousand. 
 
 ilava^amay, gratis. 
 
 illada, absent, destitute of. 
 
 illai, no. 
 
 illamal, without. 
 
 imam, frost. 
 
 inai (1), n., union, comparison; 
 (2) v.wm., to join. [suade. 
 
 iijakka-p-padnttu m., to per - 
 
 inam, a gift. 
 
 inangu, m., to yield, 
 
 inattar, relatives. 
 
 IRA 
 
 inbam, pleasantness, delights 
 
 inda (§17b), this. 
 
 inge, here. 
 
 inge yirundn, Jience. 
 
 iniya, pleasant, sweet. 
 
 innam ; innnm, yet, still. 
 
 innatkalil, nowadays. 
 
 innoru, another. 
 
 inri, without. 
 
 inru ; inraikku, to-day. 
 
 inru iravil ; — rattiri, to-night, 
 
 inu, w., to biing forth. 
 
 ippadi ; indavagaiyil, thus. 
 
 ipporudu ; ippo, now. 
 
 ira, sm., to lose. 
 
 ira, sm., to beg. 
 
 ira, sm., to die. 
 
 ira ; iravu, niglit. 
 
 iraQa, a king. 
 
 iraQa-kumaran, prince. 
 
 iraca-kumaratti, jyrincess. 
 
 iracastiri ; ira^atti, queen. 
 
 iraclttu, receijjts. [dom,. 
 
 iracciyam ; iratciyam, king- 
 
 iradari, a permit. 
 
 iraga9iyam, a secret. 
 
 iragu, a feather, quill, [prey. 
 
 irai, wmi., to pant; roar ; n. 
 
 irai, dignity, eminence, a lord. 
 
 irai, v.wm., to chafe, become 
 
 soft; str., to mix, inchasey 
 
 j)lanc ; n., yarn. 
 iraicci, meat. 
 irakkam, mercy. 
 irakku, m., to lower, 
 irai, prawn. 
 Irai, the lungs, liver. 
 Iram, moisture, damp. 
 Iramana ; iianainda, wet, 
 irandavadu, second. 
 iranglay, in two ; asunder,- 
 
99- 
 
 IRA 
 
 irai.ulu, tiro. i 
 
 irandum-adangrina, tu-ofold. ' 
 irangu, m.j to jriti/, refjret. 
 irangu, m., to dencrnd, alight, 
 irappala-k-kay, bread-fruit. 
 irappu, dcatli. 
 iratci, atr., to save. 
 iratcippu, salvation. 
 irattiii-p-pilliii, twins. 
 irattaiysly, doiibbj. 
 irattani, blood. 
 irattam vadi, mv//., to bleed; \ 
 
 str.,to cause to bleed, [luents. 
 irattam bararn, scarlet vest- 
 irattu, two-fold ; sack-cloth. 
 iraval, a loan. [borrow. 
 
 iraval {or kadan) vaiigu, ;»., to 
 iraval koclu, str., to lend. 
 iravu, loss. 
 
 iray ayam , secretari/ship. 
 irayastiri, resfiectuble, honour- 
 able [in addressiu(f). 
 
 iri, wni., to descend, be humbled. 
 
 iru, (1) !>., to break', end; (2) 
 str., to pay off. 
 
 iru, str., to draw, pull. 
 
 iru, stn., to e.vist, reniain. 
 
 irudayam, the heart. 
 
 irumal, couffh. 
 
 irumu, >??., to cough. [tight. 
 
 irugu, in., to become hard or 
 
 irul, darkness. 
 
 irumbu, n., iron. 
 
 irupp'idam, habitation, seat. 
 
 iruppn, adj., {made of ] iron ; 
 v.n., sitting, residence. 
 
 iru taram, twice. 
 
 iruttu, m., to become dark. 
 
 iruvarum, both of them. 
 
 iskoppiii, scoop. 
 
 ispanju, sponge. 
 
 KAD 
 
 isttor, store. 
 
 isttork kidangu, store-room.. 
 
 ivan (p. 34), tliis man. 
 
 iyal, w., to be able. 
 
 iyalbu, nature. 
 
 iyalbukku virodamana, un- 
 
 lyam, lead [natural. 
 
 iyanra mattum, «., utmost. 
 
 Ka, str., to protect, to wait for. 
 
 kacappu, bitterness. 
 
 kacu, cash. 
 
 ka9uba, kasba, the principal 
 village, headquarters. 
 
 kadai, a storg. * 
 
 kadiii, shop ; end. 
 
 kadai9i, the end, the last. 
 
 kadiiiQiyana, utmost. 
 
 kadiiikkaran, bazaar-man. 
 
 kada, sm., to jump over, cross.. 
 
 kadakkira turai, ford. 
 
 kadal, sea. 
 
 kadal-nandu, sea-crab. 
 
 kadalai, gram {Bengal). 
 
 kadamai, dutg, obligation. 
 
 kadan, debt. 
 
 kadan 9lttu, bond. 
 
 kadandu po, to pass, traverse. 
 
 kadan padu, ir., to become in- 
 debted. 
 
 kadan patt'iru, to owe. [bar. 
 
 kadappfirai ; alavangu, crow- 
 
 kadavadu (§42c), ought. 
 
 kadavu, m., to nail on, rivet. 
 
 kadavu, door. 
 
 kadavu-p-puttu, a door-lock. 
 
 kadi, str., to bite. [ness. 
 
 kadinam, Jiardness, mikind- 
 
 kadiyamana, severe, hard. 
 
 ka(,livalam, a bridle bit. 
 
 kadivaia-var, reins. 
 
1,00 
 
 KAD 
 
 iiadiyaram, a watch, clock. 
 .kadu, ear. 
 kfulu, JKiuile. 
 .kadudaci, paper. 
 kadudaci uriii, envelope. 
 kaduga, apeedilif. [pass swiftly. 
 kadugu, 7?., mustard; v.ni., to 
 kadukkan, earrim/. 
 kadukkul 90IIU, m., to whisper. 
 kadu-vetti, wood-cutter. 
 kaduvay, tiger ; a hyena. 
 kagidam, paper ; letter. 
 kai, hand. [stand. 
 
 kaikaruvum megai, wash-hand 
 kai-k-kotlali, hatchet. 
 kai-k-kol, walk iny -stick. 
 kai-k-kuli, a bribe. 
 kaimmiii, widowhood. 
 kaimmutti, the clenched fist, 
 kaim-pen, widow. 
 kai-mudal, capital, principal. 
 .kaippidi, a handful. 
 kai-t-tuvaliii, napkin, 
 kai-vedi, pistol. 
 kai-vilakku, hand-lamp. 
 kai-yalu, w., to practise, handle. 
 kai-y-iruppu, balance in hand. 
 kaiyoppam, signature. 
 kaiyoppam vai, str., to sign. 
 kai-y-iilla natkali, arm-chair. 
 kaiyurai ; kilavs, glove. 
 kakkai, crow. [learn. 
 
 kal (1), n. stone (2) v.w., to 
 kal (1) paw, leg (2) quarter. 
 ,kala, str., to nnx. 
 kaliii, a bull. 
 
 ksd'sii; vidiyatkalam, morning. 
 kalakkam, agitation, commo- 
 ialakku, m., to stir, [tion. 
 kalam, a measure of grain, 
 kalam, threshing -floor, shoal. 
 
 KAN 
 
 kalam, season, period, time. 
 kalame, in the morning. 
 kalafijiyam, a granary, treas- 
 kalappiii ; er, a plough, [ury. 
 kalappu, mixture, concrete. 
 kalavali ; tirudan, tliief. 
 kali, str., to rejoice. 
 kalavu 9ey, to steal, rob. 
 kalavu ; tiruttu, theft. 
 kali- man, clay. 
 kaiippu, joy. 
 
 kaliyai.iam, felicity, marriage 
 kalla^ari, a stone-mason. 
 kallaii, a thief. 
 kaiiar, collar. 
 kallarai, a rock cave. 
 kal-1-Iral, liver. 
 kal-mariii, hail-storm, 
 kal-tagadu, slab of stone. 
 kalvi, learning. 
 kalvi-c-calai, college, 
 kalviman, a learned man. 
 kalviral, toe. 
 kaman, arch. 
 kambalam, a blanket, rug. 
 kambayam, a coarse cloth. 
 kambali, blanket. 
 kambi, wire. 
 kambu ; tadi, pole, stick. 
 kambu, a stalk, stem. 
 kaml9U, shirt. 
 
 kamugu-maram, the areca- 
 kan, an eye. [nut tree, 
 
 kiin, w., to see. 
 kan ; kal, a drain. 
 kanakku, an account. 
 kanakkan, accountant. 
 kanal, r a pour. 
 kanatta ; kattiyana, thick. 
 kanbi, str., to cause to see, in- 
 kandai, a rag, [timate. 
 
lot 
 
 KAN 
 
 kandakkii; kandattar, mmhic- 
 karidaTTirilili, scrofula. [tor. 
 kaiuli, sir., to rejirore, rebuke. 
 kaiujippu, Htrictness ; unfinf/. 
 kai.K.lu pi<li, fttr., to find. 
 kangfini ; melviyari, overseer. 
 kan<,'ii, f^aiiff. 
 kai.ii, the fraction ^. 
 ktini, fruit. 
 
 kani kodada, unfruitful. 
 kafjji, rice i/ruel. 
 kannadi, mirror. 
 kain.iadi-t-tattu, a jiane of \ 
 kaiiijiip, cJirck. [(/lass. 
 
 kauni ; kumriri, a damsel, 
 kai.iui, snare, [spinster. 
 
 kanuimai, maidenhood. 
 kannimjli; kannidar, eyelid. 
 kauniiiiai-inayir, ei/elas/i. 
 k a 1.1 1.1 T r , tea rs . [ iceep . 
 
 kaiinlr-vidii, ir, to shed tears, 
 kani'U, seed I in ff; calf, [ceive. 
 kai.i (p. 50, No. '26)), to see, per- 
 kai.iu ; kuiiticcu, a joint. 
 kai.iuk-kal, the anlde. 
 kappal, sldp. 
 
 kapp'attu, m.., to take care of, 
 kappi, a pulleij. [preserve. 
 
 kfippi ; koppi, coffee. 
 kap-pordu, cupboard. 
 kappii, (juard, preservation. 
 karadi, a bedr. 
 karadu muradana, uneven. 
 karjii, bund, hank. 
 karili, wtn., urugu, m., to melt^ 
 kaniindu po, to dissolve. 
 karili-p-paduttu, m., to stain. 
 kariiiyan, n-liite ants. 
 kfiran, doer, maker. 
 karaiidi^ spoon. 
 karappan, itching. 
 
 KAV 
 
 karattai, carria<ie. 
 kareci, str., to roar. 
 kari, str., to subtract, deduct. 
 kari, curr:/. 
 kan9aiiai, tender rare. 
 kari \ am, affair. 
 karppuram, camphor. 
 karttigai, Norember-lJecember^ 
 karu, n., embri/o, nundd. 
 karudiii," ass. 
 
 karudu, m., to think, mean. 
 karugal, darkness. 
 karumbu, sutjarcane. 
 kaiun-gal, (jranite. 
 karungali hiaram, eboiiy. 
 karutta ; karuppana, black. 
 karuttu, neck. [tie.. 
 
 kariittuk kuttai, wrapper, neck- 
 karuva-p-pattai, cinnamon. 
 karuvadu, dry fish. 
 karuvi ; ayudam, tool. 
 kariivu, m., to wash. 
 kat9attai, trousers. 
 katpalagai, a slate. 
 katpi, to teach, order. 
 kattai, block, log. 
 kattirikkol, a pair of scissors^ 
 katti, knife. 
 katti, lump. 
 kattil, bedstead. 
 kattil pudaviiigal, bedclothes,. 
 katt'iru, sm., to wait. 
 kattu, wind, breeze. 
 kattn, a bond, tie; parcel; 
 kattu, m., totie, build, [bayidaye.. 
 kattu, m., to show. 
 kattuttari, a jwst, stake. 
 kaval, defence, guard. 
 kavalai, care, sorrow. 
 kavalaiylnam, neglect. 
 kavalali, prisoner. 
 
JL02 
 
 KAV 
 
 ikavanam, attent'nm. 
 kiivani, str., to take notice of. 
 kavaificam, pair ofcompas.se.s. 
 Ivjiyatka, str., to natch. 
 kavatkaraii, watchman. 
 kavattai, the fork of a branch. 
 kavattu 9ey, «•., to prune. 
 kavuccu, couch. 
 ^kayam, a icound. 
 kfiyccal; juram, fever. 
 kiiyccu, in., to ivann. 
 liiiyidam, letter. 
 kayiru, rope, twine. 
 kebi ; kugai, a den, cave. 
 kedu, ir., to pjerish, spoil. 
 keda, ruin. 
 kekkn, cake. 
 kel, w., to hear ; ask. 
 ikelvi, hearing, queMum. [roar. 
 kercci (/or karcci), ntr,, to 
 iketta, />(?rf, evil. 
 kettal, kettle. 
 kettiyaiia, clever. 
 kidaiigu, a warehouse, 
 kll, Jmuje ; jntch, tar. 
 ]kili, parrot. \jto nip. 
 
 killu, (1) n., a pinch ; (2) v.m., 
 'kindu, m., to dig, poke. 
 kindu palagai, coffee rake. 
 .klr, below, east. 
 kiiadi, rail. 
 kirai, vegetables. 
 .kirakku, east. 
 ;kivamai, dag of the week. 
 'kirambu, cloves. 
 kirangu ; ver, root, yam. 
 kiravan, old man. 
 kiFavi, old ivoman. 
 ikirayam ; viJai, cost, value. 
 ikire ; paniya, below, down. 
 Jiire vidu, to drop. 
 
 KOP 
 
 kiri ; str., pli'u, m., to tear. 
 klr-p-padidal [or -padivu), 
 
 obedience. 
 kir-p-pad iyjida, insubordinate. 
 kir- p - pad iy a mil i , d isobedien ce . 
 kirubai, (/race. 
 kirumi ; puiu, a wonn. 
 kitta (§52), near by. 
 kittina, near, short. [near. 
 kittu, 7n., to approach, be 
 kobam, anger. 
 
 kobam muttu, m., to provoke. 
 kobam-ulla, angrgr 
 kobi, str. ; kandi, str., to sr<dd. 
 koburam, tower. 
 koccik-kav, cliilli, red pepper. 
 kodiii-k-kalam, hot season. 
 kodali, axe. 
 kodi, stv., to boil. 
 kodi, a flag. 
 kodiya, cruel, barbarous. 
 kodn, str.. to give, gvant, pay. 
 kodukku, sting of wasp. 
 kodumiii, cruelty. 
 kodumai ma, wheat-flour. 
 kokki, cook. 
 kol, w., to kill. 
 kol, w., to take. 
 koi, rod. 
 
 kol, v.n., taking ; calumny. 
 koiiii 9ey, to kill. 
 kollai, robbery. 
 koilaii, blacksmith. 
 kombu, a branch, horn. 
 konalana, crooked, zigzag. 
 kondirattukkaran, contractor. 
 kondu va (p. 49, No. 17), to 
 
 bring. 
 konjam; atpam, a little. 
 konj an kuriiiya, almost, nearly, 
 koppai, cup. \well-7iigh. 
 
KOP 
 
 k6ppi-c-cedi, cojfee bush. 
 
 koppu, branch. 
 
 kori, fowl. 
 
 kori-k-kufiju, chicken. 
 
 kortu, court. 
 
 koruppu, t/rease, fat; impu- 
 
 kottiii, fortress. [dence. 
 
 kottiii, nut. 
 
 kottan, an owl. 
 
 kottappuli, mallet, 
 
 kottu, coat. 
 
 kottu, to ffrnb, pick. 
 
 kovil, temple, church. 
 
 kovis, cabbafje. 
 
 ku9avan, a potter. 
 
 kuccam, sht/ness. 
 
 ku9ini, kitchen. 
 
 ku9iiii-metti, kitchen-boy. 
 
 ku9U, m., to be s/nj. 
 
 kuda (§62), togetJier. 
 
 ku(lada, unable. 
 
 kudadu, cannot (§ 41). 
 
 kudiii, n., umbrella; v. wm.j 
 
 to excavate, scoop. 
 kiK^ai, basket. 
 kudam, water -pot. 
 ka(]a-p-p6, to accompany. 
 kudfiram, tent. 
 kudi, household^ inhabitant. 
 kudi. str.y to drink. 
 kiidi9ai, hut, cottage. 
 kudiriii, horse. 
 kudiriii eri-p-p6, to ride. 
 kudiriii-k-karaa, horse-keeper. 
 kudiriii-layam, a stable. 
 kudinii-p-padai, bridle-path. 
 kudi yana van , ho useholder. 
 kudiyiru, sm., to dwell, inhabit. 
 kudu, n., cage ; socket; v. m., 
 
 to combine, be able. 
 ku(^um (§ 41), can. 
 
 108 
 KUR 
 
 kudumbam, family, [family. 
 kudumbattan, a member of a 
 kukkural; caiidai, n., clamour, 
 kulam, tank. [quarrel. 
 
 kulam, caste, race. 
 kulavi, wasp. 
 kiiii, wagefi. 
 kuli, str., to bathe. 
 kiiiikkaran ; kuliyal, coolie. 
 kulikkira ariii, bath-room. 
 kuiikkira turai, bathing-place. 
 kuiir, cold, chill. 
 kuiircciyana, cold. 
 kuliyal, labourer. 
 kumarau, a son. 
 kumasta, clerk. 
 kumukku, whole, total, mass. 
 kunam, quality. 
 kundu9i, pin. 
 kuni, wm., to stoop. 
 kuniyiral, shrimp. 
 kuppidu, ir., to call. 
 kuradu, tongs. 
 kuriii, a thatched roof. 
 kuriii, wm., to decrease. 
 kuriiiccal, scarcity. 
 kuriiivana, imperfect. 
 kuraivu; kurai, deficiency , im- 
 kural, tube, flute, [perfection. 
 kuralana, hollow. 
 kurandai, infant. 
 kurangu, monkey. 
 kurappam, confusion, 
 kurccu, a stake. 
 kuri, mark; symptom, 
 kuri, pit. 
 
 kuri mu9al, rabbit. 
 kurippu, a note, sign. 
 kuritta velai, task. 
 kurittu, about, concerning. 
 kurittu-vai, str., to note down. 
 
104 
 
 KUR 
 
 kuri-y-arivi, str., to proclaim, 
 kuriya ; kurii ; knrnm ; kuttu, 
 
 .short, deficient. 
 kui'mjii, shcirjmess. [2)riest. 
 kiiru {jyl. kuriikkal), teacher ^ 
 kiirudan, a blind man. 
 kurudu, Idindness. 
 kurukku, cross (oblique). 
 kurukku-t-tappal, a cross-bar. 
 kururam, cruelty. 
 kuruvi, bird. 
 kushta-rogam, leprosy. 
 kutttii, shortness. 
 kuttali, compayiion, friend. 
 kiittam, band : meeting. 
 kuttam, fjuilt, blame. 
 kuttam illamai, innocence. 
 kuttafi 9attu, m., to accuse, 
 
 charge. 
 kuttan-kudu, m., to assemble. 
 kuttavali, a criminal. 
 kutti, young of an animal. 
 kuttu, proclamation. 
 kuttu, ?7i. ; (^ev,wm., to gather. 
 kuttu, m. ; tai, str., to j^fick, 
 
 pierce. 
 kuttu ; i(li, str., to pjound. 
 kuvaliii, mug ; water-lily. 
 kuva ma, arrowroot. 
 kuvi, str., to heap up. 
 kuviyal, ti., /nlc, lieap. 
 
 Lacci, a drawer. 
 
 laccip-petti, chest of drawers. 
 
 ladakkarau, farrier. 
 
 ladain, horseslioe. 
 
 landar, lantern. 
 
 lay am, a stable. 
 
 layan, linex, or <oolie sheds. 
 
 Ie9ana, light, easy. 
 
 lefij i , handkerchief. 
 
 MAN 
 
 lingu, li7ik. 
 loham, zinc. 
 
 Ma, flour, meal; mango tree; 
 
 the fraction /s. 
 macalai, curry stuff, drugs. 
 ma9am; madam, month. 
 maccup-po, to decay. 
 ma9i, February -March ; mist, 
 madangada, unyielding, rigid, 
 madangu, m., to yield. 
 madi, str., to estimate; respect, 
 madi, str., to fold. 
 madippu, an estimate. 
 madippu, a fold. 
 madiri, n., model, example. 
 madu ; erudu, bullock. 
 magal, daughter. 
 magan, son. 
 magani, the fraction A. 
 mai ; tmdai, ink. 
 makkac-colam, maize, com- 
 mal, pjalace. [flour, 
 
 maliii, hill. 
 
 malai, a garland ; evening. 
 malai-p-pakkam, hill-side. 
 maliiiyaruvi, mountain torrent, 
 maligai, mansion. 
 mailu, wrestling. 
 maman, father-in-law, uncle, 
 mam param, mango fruit. 
 marai, ruotlter- in-law, aunt. 
 man, deer. 
 man; nilam, eartJi. 
 m aiia - c - catc i , con scirn ce . 
 mana9u ; manadu, mind. 
 manal, sand. 
 manam, rnind. 
 maiiam illada, reluctant. 
 ma,nii-i"ci\nimy'iin\, contentu I cut, 
 manastabam, 92., regret. 
 
MAN 
 
 manastaba-p-padu, ir., to re- 
 
 punt. 
 
 mauvetti, mattock {mamatty). 
 
 mandai, 'a flock. 
 
 mandan, a foolish person. 
 
 mandi, black monkeij. 
 
 mani, hell ; hour. 
 
 mai.iikkattu, tlie wrist. 
 
 mfiniyam, grant of land free of 
 
 mafijal, yellow ; sa^ffr on. [tax. 
 
 maujai nir, saffron water. 
 
 mauiii, str.^ to foryive. 
 
 maunippu, foryiveness, pardon. 
 
 manidan ; mauushan, man. 
 
 manu ; manuvu, a petition, re- 
 
 manushi, woman. [quest. 
 
 mfippandam, jmstry. 
 
 mappillai , h rid eg room, 
 
 mara, sm., to forget. 
 
 marai, wm., to vanish, hide. 
 
 mariii, rain. 
 
 mariii-c-catt;ai, rain-coat. 
 
 mariii illfimai, drought. 
 
 maram, a tree, timber. 
 
 mara-nay, pole-cat. 
 
 marbn, breast. 
 
 marb'u9i, a breast-pin, brooch. 
 
 mjlrgari , December- January. 
 
 mari-kalam or mariii- kalam, 
 rainy season. 
 
 mari mari, alternately. 
 
 mariyadiii, civility. 
 
 mariyal, a stopping, jail. 
 
 mariyatkarau, jyrisoner. 
 
 maru, str., to refuse, contra- 
 dict, deny. 
 
 maru, other, ne.ct. 
 
 marumagal, daughter-in-law, 
 niece. [nephew. 
 
 marumagan, son-in-law, 
 
 marumori, answer. 
 
 10{^ 
 
 MET 
 
 marungalana, dull. 
 marundu, medicine. 
 marupadiyum ; tirumbavum^ 
 matta, otlier [again^ 
 
 mattam, measure, rule. 
 mattam ; mattakkudiriii, a 
 
 ])ony. 
 matten (§47e), I will 7iot. 
 mfittiriii, pill. 
 matt'iriii99i, beef. 
 mattiram, only. 
 mattiyauam, mid-day, 
 mattu, m., to alter. 
 mattiikkaran, cattle-keeper, 
 mattum, until. 
 mattu -mandiii, a herd. 
 mattu-p-patti, cattle-shed. 
 mayir, hair. 
 me9iii, taUe. 
 
 me9ai-t-tuppatti, table-cloth. 
 mediii, platfmm. 
 meduvana, soft. 
 meduvay, slowly. 
 megam, cloud. 
 mel, ^fine, soft. 
 mel, above ; the west. 
 mel, mellu, w. to chew. 
 melana, upper, superior. 
 melanavan, n., superior. 
 mella, slowly. 
 melliya, fine, thin. 
 melum, moreover. 
 mel vila9am, address. 
 merugu, (1) n., wax; (2) ?;.?/?.,- 
 
 to smear. 
 merugu vatti, candle. 
 met jodu, stockings. 
 metkatti, an awning. 
 met kottu, overcoat. 
 metku, west. 
 metpadi, ditto,. aforesaid. 
 
i06 
 
 MET 
 
 metpakkam, top, or west side 
 mettai, mattress, cushion, bed. 
 mey, truth, body. 
 mey, {l)iv7n., to graze, to thatch; 
 
 (2) str., to feed (cattle J, 
 meyccal, pasture. 
 meyppan, shepherd. 
 meyyana ; nigamana, true. 
 miccam, excess, remainder. 
 midi, the remains. 
 roidi, str., to stamp, trample. 
 miga, migavum ; metta, much, 
 migu (p. 47), to exceed, [very. 
 milagu, pepper. 
 mm, fish. 
 
 min ; minnal, lightning. 
 minittu; nimisham, a minute. 
 mirudu, softness. 
 mirugam, animal. 
 mogamana, dangerous. 
 mo, am., to smell. 
 mondu par, sir., to smell. 
 moppam, smell. 
 movay, chin. 
 
 moy, str., to crowd, swarm. 
 muQal, a hai-e. 
 mudal, the first,* principal. 
 mudalam, mudalavadu (§20), 
 mudal taram, first n-ife. [first. 
 mudam, latneness. 
 mudam, foolishness. 
 mudattanmili, ignorant state. 
 mudi, a crown. 
 mudi, a cover, lid. 
 mudi, wm,., to end, he finished; 
 
 str., to finisJi. 
 mudiccu, knot. 
 mudippu, a tie, jntrse. 
 mudivu ; kadaigi, n., the end. 
 miidu, m., to cover. 
 imudugu, the hack {of body). 
 
 MUT 
 
 miidu pani, mist, fog. 
 mugadavu, in presence, in 
 
 person. 
 mugadu ; modu, roof, ridge, 
 mugam, face. 
 mugurtta nal, wedding-day. 
 mukkadu, veil. 
 mukkal, threefourths. 
 mukkonam, triangle. 
 mukku, nose. 
 mul ; mullu, thorn, fork, 
 mulai, corner, angle. 
 mtilai, brain. 
 mulai, breast [female), 
 mulai, str., to sprout. 
 miilam, root, bulb, cause, 
 mullulla, prickly. 
 mun ; munne, before. 
 munbu, munbaga, in front of. 
 munda, previously, formerly 
 
 {inf. of mundu). 
 mundili nfil, day before yester- 
 mundina, prior. [day. 
 
 mundi-p-p6, to lead, advance. 
 mundu, m.., to precede. 
 mungil, bamboo. 
 munname, before; already. 
 munru, three. 
 muppadu, thirty. 
 murai, order, manner, com- 
 muradana, coarse. [plaint 
 murai ppattu-k-karan ; vadi, 
 
 complainant. 
 rauniiyidu, zr., to complain. 
 muran kai, elbow. 
 muyan kal, knee. 
 muri, (1) wm., to become broken; 
 
 (2) str., to break. 
 murudum ; muttilum, ivh<dly. 
 murukku, m,., to wring, twist. 
 mutta kudiyal, the elder wife. 
 
MUT 
 
 muttiii, rr/ff. 
 muttjli ; kattu. a btmdle. 
 inuitam, o kiss. 
 muttam, a <oiirt-i/ar(L 
 mfittaval, rlilcr ivom.an. 
 mfutavan. tUler n an. 
 muttilum, eutirelij, utterly, 
 inuttirili, seal. [quite. 
 
 muttu, /leaii, 
 muyatci, i^/f'ort. 
 
 Nabagam ; yadi, rnemuri/. 
 
 na9ain, destruction, loss. 
 
 Dada, .s ///,., to uallc. 
 
 nacjiii, u-alh; i/ait, pace. 
 
 na<lakkiii, n., conduct. 
 
 lUK.lattu, ui., t(t conduct, direct. 
 
 2ia<j6rnni, daili/. 
 
 na(.lu, /;'., to plant. 
 
 iiac.lii ; niatti, cottre. 
 
 nadu, countrij, jtrovince. 
 
 naduiigu, /;/., to trouble. 
 
 lUKJu nittiri, widnii/ht. 
 
 naduve ; iide, amid, between. 
 
 nagili. sir. to laurfh. 
 
 nagili ; abaranaiii, jeivel. 
 
 na'jam, a nail, claw. 
 
 naganavay, the urina bird. 
 
 nagaram, citj/. 
 
 nagu, ir., to shine, lawjh. 
 
 nakku, w., to suck, lap. 
 
 nfikku, tonfjue. 
 
 nakku mm, sole-fish. 
 
 nal, nallu, v.yn., to love.; n., 
 
 nril, a daij. [the middle. 
 
 iiaiadu, current. 
 
 naird ; naliiikku, to-morrow. 
 
 naihi, (food. 
 
 nal toriim or nadorum, daily. 
 
 naiu ; nangu, four. 
 
 nambikkai, w., trust. 
 
 107 
 NER 
 
 nambii, m., to trust, e.v]>ect. 
 
 nanili, (1) wm., to be wet; (2) 
 )t., toddij, flower buds. 
 
 nanaivu, wet, moisture. 
 
 nanal, a reed. 
 
 nai.iam ; adakkam, modesty, 
 
 naiidu, crab, lobster. 
 
 nane ; nsiu taii, un/self. 
 
 nafiju ; visham, poisoji. 
 
 nanray, well. 
 
 nanri, ijoodness, yratitude. 
 
 nanri ketta, unyrateful. 
 
 narjii, yreyness. 
 
 nariiiyulla. grey. 
 
 narafiju narattai, orange. 
 
 nari, jackal. 
 
 nashtam ; kedu, loss, harm,, 
 
 natcattiram, star. 
 
 natkali, a quadruped, chair, 
 
 natpadu, forty. 
 
 natpu, friendship. 
 
 nattu, a plant. 
 
 nay, dog. 
 
 nay a, str., to love. 
 
 nayagau, headman, 
 
 iiayirii, tJie sun. 
 
 nay i tt u - k - kiramai , Sunday, 
 
 nediya, nedum, long, tall. 
 
 nedumai, length. 
 
 nedun-cappattu, boots. 
 
 nel ; nellu ; ari9i, rice, paddy. 
 
 nenju, the breast, chest. 
 
 neraga, straightforwa rd. 
 
 neram, time. 
 
 neram tavarada, punctual. 
 
 nerana, straight, honest. 
 
 neri, conduct. 
 
 neridu, ir., to encounter, to 
 
 nermiii, honesty. [happen. 
 
 neruppu ; anal, fire. 
 
 neruppu-k-kiradi, orate. 
 
108 
 
 NET 
 
 uettiii, tallnefm. 
 netti, forehead. 
 netta, ijesterdrnj 
 ney, (I) n., ghee; (2) r.u\, to 
 neyani, alf'ection. [^iveave. 
 
 nl, s^/'., to abandon. 
 nl trine, thijself. 
 nicaiij, niccayam, eertainti/. 
 nidanam, justness; criterion. 
 nidipadi ; nidivan, judge. 
 nidistalain, court. [remoral. 
 nikkam ; iilkkii, sejjaration, 
 nlkku, VI., to rein ore, avert. 
 nil, ?r., to stand, stop. 
 nila ; candiran, moon. 
 iiila veliccani, moon-liglit. 
 nilai, (1) str., to abide, to last; 
 (2) n., condition, position. 
 nilaimai, quality, condition. 
 nilam ; tariii, ground. 
 nllam, blue. 
 
 nllam, length. [tion. 
 
 nilamai, landed property, sta- 
 nilam ala, sm., to survey. 
 iiilamana, long. 
 nliamana, blue. 
 niluviti, balance. 
 nimir, wni., to become erect. 
 nimirttu, m., to set ujwight. 
 nimisham, moment. 
 nimittam, for the sake of. 
 iiinai, str., to think. 
 iiinaivu ; cindanai, thought. 
 niniiivu kiir, wm., to remember. 
 Hindu, )n., to swim. 
 nir, (1) you ; (2) nater. 
 nira^a vastu, mineral. 
 nIr luattam, v-ater -level. [rent. 
 nlr ottam , mrppayccal, tor- 
 nirtli, wm., to become full. 
 niriii ; param, weight. 
 
 ODU 
 
 nirai, (1) wm., to be in order; 
 (2) str., to arrange. 
 
 nirai ; \ ari, lijie. 
 
 niriiinda, full. 
 
 nirai, shadoir. 
 
 nirani ; variiam, colour. 
 
 nirambii {intr.), m., nirappu 
 {tran.), in., to till. 
 
 niravi. a well ; steam. 
 
 nlrppfiyccu, ?//., to water. 
 
 nirfc-tara, wild duck. 
 ' nirii, str., to weigh. 
 
 niriitr^i, m.. to ditain. 
 
 nitipati , nitivau, judge. 
 
 nitistalam, court. 
 nitpandam (properly, nirb- 
 
 andam), misery. 
 nittiriii, sleep. 
 nittiraiyay, asleep. 
 nittu, length. 
 
 nittu, »?. ; viri, .s^r., to stretch. 
 nivirtti, removal. 
 niyami, str., to appoint. 
 niyayacanam, be^ich {law). 
 niyayam, reason, justice. 
 niyayamana, right. 
 no, (1) 71., aching, pain ; (2) v. 
 
 wm., to ache. 
 nokkam, view, object. 
 nokku, m., to look. 
 novup-paduttu, m., to hurt. 
 nul, (1) n., thread, line; (2) 
 mini, 2^0 int. [r.w., to spin. 
 nurai, (1) ivm., to creep in, to 
 trespass ; (2) str., to insen 
 nuru, hundred. 
 nutpamana, adj., minute, jine, 
 
 0, str., to resemble. 
 odiii, water-course. 
 odu, a shell, tile. ' 
 
109 
 
 ODU 
 
 odu, )n.j to nm, flee. 
 0(lukku, 111., to oppress. 
 odulvku, a corner, shelter. 
 olli, thinness. 
 onay, wolf. 
 onbadu, nine. 
 
 • o 1.1 (I i k k a ran , bachelor. 
 oiuliyana ; ottiii, single. 
 onrum illai, nothing. 
 oppaiii, affreenient, signature. 
 oppi, str., to deliver up; prove. 
 oppu, w., to consent. 
 ■oppuk-kodu, str., to consign, 
 
 surrender. 
 oppiivi, str., to deliver. 
 orara, margin, edge. 
 oralo9i, clock. 
 ore, one unhj, same. 
 or idattilum illiii, nowhere, 
 oru (§ 18), an. 
 •oru pakkattil, aside. 
 oru krdum illiii, never. 
 oriikkam, conduct. 
 oruinikka, together. 
 
 • orunt^aua, ref/ular. 
 orungu, rule, nu'thod. 
 orii-patta, together. 
 oruturam ; oruvi9ai, once. 
 ottaciii ; udavi, help. 
 ottagam, a camel. [re7it. 
 ottam, a course ; gallop ; cur- 
 otti, a mortgage. 
 
 ott'iru, sin., to resemble. 
 ottu, m., to drive. 
 ottukkol, u\, to acknouH 
 ottu-p-pilr, str., to compare. 
 ovvoru, each, every. 
 6y, ivm. ; ori, win.', ninru po, to 
 
 cease. 
 oyada, incessant. 
 
 PAL 
 
 Pa^ai, language. [gear. 
 
 pa9ali, Fusly,-'- official revenue 
 paccaiyana, green; raw. 
 paci, hunger. 
 
 pa9U, (1) a cow ; (2) green, pure. 
 padiii, layer ; army. 
 padam ; adi, foot. 
 padi, according. 
 padi (§ 64), step; way; measure. 
 padi, str., to read, learn. 
 padil ; padilaga, instead of. 
 padi-p-padiyay, gradually. 
 padippi, str., to educate. 
 padiyal, for, because, whereas. 
 padu, (1) ir., to suffer, under- 
 go ; (2) str., to lie down. 
 padu, m., to sing. 
 padukkai, bed. 
 padukkiii-y-arai, bedroom, 
 padungu, m., to hide. 
 pagiii, enmity. 
 pagal, day {time). 
 pagam, share. 
 pagudi, division ; share, 
 pai, a bag. 
 pai9a ; 9alli, a pie. 
 paittiyam, madness. 
 paiyan, boy. 
 pakkam ; vila, side. 
 pakkiyam, happiness. 
 pal ; palln, tooth. 
 pal, milk. 
 
 pal pa9ii, milch coiv. 
 pala ; anega, several, many, 
 pfiladai, cream. 
 palagai, a board. 
 palam, force. 
 palam, bridge. 
 palam ulla, strong. 
 palan, result; advantage. 
 
 * The Arabic name lor a year, commouly used in India. 
 
110 
 
 PAL 
 
 palau kodu, str., to produce 
 
 results or pro/it. 
 palavandam, force, violence. 
 pali, a sacrijiee. 
 palingu, (jlasH. 
 pallam, a pit, hollow. 
 palli, a lizard. 
 palli-k-kii(lam, school- house. 
 paiiivacal, mosque. 
 paiiu-p-parus, toothbrush. 
 pallu-vali, toothache. 
 pambu, snake. 
 panai, the palmyra tree. 
 panai ; koppai, a pot. 
 panam, mo7iey. 
 panappai, money-purse. 
 pang-idu,iV.; piri,s^r., to divide. 
 pangu, section, part, portion. 
 panguni, the month March- 
 pani, dew. [April. 
 
 panidi, jewels. 
 paiiju, cotton. 
 pannu, m., to make. 
 panri {vuly. panni, pandi), a 
 panri-y-iraicci, pork. [hog. 
 par, str., to see, look. 
 para, other. 
 para, old. 
 para, sm., to fly. 
 paragu, ?;?., to practise. 
 parai, a drum,. 
 parai ; kat-parai, a rock. 
 paviiiya, old. 
 parakku, m., to train. 
 paralogam, heaven. 
 param, a fruit. 
 param ; 9umai, a load. 
 param arai, wm., to pulp. 
 paramal vidu, to overlook. 
 paramana, heavy. [nourish. 
 paramari, str., to manage; 
 
 PAT 
 
 parambu {intr,), m. ; parappu. 
 
 (tran.), ni., to spread. 
 paramori, procerh. 
 parai.i, a loft 
 pari, fitr., to snatch away. 
 pari, hlanic; revcnye. 
 pari vangu, m., to rerenf/e. 
 paridfibam, pity. 
 paritciii, a trial, Cd-periment.. 
 patiyari, a doctor, barber. 
 parkkiliim (§ 64, b), than. 
 parli ari9i, barley. 
 paru, str., to become large. 
 paru, str., to mature. 
 paradu, fault, damage. 
 parudu par, str. , to mend,repair^ 
 parutta, ripe. 
 
 parutta ; pushtiyulla, stout. 
 parvai, siylit, inspection. 
 pashai, language. 
 patci, a bird. [vour, 
 
 patci, str. ; virungu, m., tode-^ 
 patpala, many, several. 
 pattiii, a bark; stripe. 
 pattam, title ; reign. 
 pattan, grand father. 
 pattanam, town. 
 pattayam, sword ; title-deed. 
 patti, grandmother. 
 patti, devotion. 
 patti, regarding. 
 pattippidi, str., to cling, grasp. 
 pattiram, a vessel, cup; worthi- 
 pattiram, care. [i 
 
 pattiramana, worthy. 
 pattiramana, safe. 
 pattiyam, diet. 
 pattiyam, bail. 
 pattu, ten. 
 pattu, song, 
 pattu, silk. 
 
Ill 
 
 PAT 
 
 pattu, seizure, attachment ; plas- 
 pattu, w., to grasp. [ter, 
 
 pattu madangay, tenfold. 
 pattuccittu ; ra9ldu, receipt. 
 pfivam, .sin. 
 pfivanai kfittu, in. ; pa9angu 
 
 pai.iim, m., to pretend. 
 pay, mat. 
 
 pay, wm. ; kudi, str., to leap, 
 payam, fear. [rush. 
 
 payam uruttu, m., to threaten. 
 payan, result. 
 payai.iam po, to travel. 
 payappaduttu, ?/?., to terrify. 
 payir-idu, iV., to cultivate. 
 payittiyam, inadncxs. 
 payccu, m., to irrigate, 
 pe9u, ?Ai., to apeak. 
 pedam, difference. 
 pedam illada, uniform. 
 pedaimtii, simplicity, [power. 
 pelan ; vallaniiii, strength, 
 pelavlna; pelavTiiamana, weak. 
 pen, a few ale. 
 penyadi ; manilivi, wife. 
 pen panri (pai.uli), sow. 
 pen pilliii, female child. 
 pen tori, bridesmaid. 
 penai, pen. 
 
 peniii-k-katti, penknife. 
 per, na)nc. 
 
 peri9u; perij, revenue. 
 peran, grandson. 
 per idu, t*r., to name. 
 peril, upon, concerning. 
 periya, great, grand, large. 
 periya pu9aiiik-kay, pumpkin. 
 periya turiii, superintendent. 
 pertti, granddaughter. 
 peru, ir., to obtain. 
 peru viral, the thumb. 
 
 PIR 
 
 perugu, m.y to increase, grow. 
 perukku, m.; adigari, str., to 
 
 multiply. 
 perukku ; kuttu, m., to sweep, 
 peruniai, greatness, pride. 
 peruii-kadu ; vanam, foiest, 
 perun-tara, goose. 
 pettili, a hen, female. 
 pettai-k-kudirai, mare. 
 pettar, parents. 
 petti, bo.v, case. 
 pettor, parents. 
 pey, w., to scatter, rain. 
 pi9agu, m., to miss ; n., amis- 
 picciii, alms. [take, 
 
 picciii kel, w., to beg [alms). 
 picin, gum. 
 PI9U, fee. 
 
 pidi, str., to catch, seize. 
 pidittiravi, vice {blacksmith's), 
 pidungu, m., to pluck, pick. 
 pikka9u ; pikkan, pickaxe. 
 pila, sm., to split. 
 piiaviii, cancer. 
 plli ; kural, j)ipe. 
 piilfii, cJiild ; caste title, 
 pin, after. 
 pinam, a corpse. 
 pin 9el, w,, to follow. 
 pin todar, wm., to trace. 
 pin-mari-kalam, N.E. mon- 
 pinai ; jamln, security, [soon. 
 pinbu ; pinnale, after. 
 pindu, ;;/ . , to go behind, be late, 
 pingan, jjZa(<?. 
 pinne, behind, back. 
 pippay, cask. 
 pira, sm., to be born. 
 piradana, chief. [adversary, 
 piradivadi ; edirali, defendant^ 
 piraga9i, str., to illuminate. 
 
112 
 
 PIR 
 
 |)iraga9amana, brif/ht. 
 
 pirage ; pirakale, behind. 
 
 piragu, after. 
 
 piriii, c.str. , to lire ; n. , an error, 
 
 piraiyulla, incorrect. 
 
 pirani, animals. 
 
 pirappu, birth. 
 
 pira9angam, ftennon. 
 
 pira9ittamana, public. 
 
 pirave9i, .sfr., to enter. 
 
 pi ray ai.iam, a jon rney. 
 
 pirayaeam, pains, effort, 
 
 pirayri9ap padu, to try. 
 
 pirayoQauam-ulla, usefnl. 
 
 piredak kuri, 7i., a grave. 
 
 piredam, dead body. 
 
 piri, WW., to become separated ; 
 str., to separate. 
 
 piris, saucer. 
 
 piriyamulla, dear, 
 
 piru, w., to tear. 
 
 pittalai, brass. 
 
 po (p. 51, No. 37), to go. 
 
 podada, insujjicient, 
 
 podi, powder. 
 
 podi, a sack. 
 
 podi, str.\ padippi, str., to in- 
 struct, teach. 
 
 podi-madu, pack bullock. 
 
 podiyan, lad. [^u-ear. 
 
 podu, ir., to cast down, put; 
 
 podu ^/orporuGuJ, time, while. 
 
 podu, common. 
 
 podu-p-padai, puhlic path. 
 
 podu, wm., to be sufficient. 
 
 podum, enough. 
 
 poduvana, general, common. 
 
 pokkisham, a treasure, [text. 
 
 pokku ; 9akku, n. , excuse, pre- 
 
 pol ; pola ; padi, as. 
 
 pol ; otta, like. 
 
 PUD 
 
 pola-c-cey, it"., to imitate. 
 pollada, ivicked, vile. 
 pon, gold. 
 
 poramai, impatience ; envy. 
 pori, a sign; spark; trap. 
 porivana malai, precipice. 
 poru, u\, to fight. [during. 
 porudu, time, sun; adr., while 
 porul, substarice, meaning. 
 porumai, patience. 
 porundu, m., to unite ; fit. 
 poruttam, contract. 
 poruttauai, voic. 
 poruttu, for the sake of. 
 poruttu, (1) v.m., to cause to 
 
 agree, to unite; (2) n., a 
 
 ju7ictio7i, joint. 
 pottal, bottle. 
 pottani, a bundle of cloth. 
 pottanikkaran, a hawker. 
 poy, falsehood. [falsely). 
 
 poy-c-collu, 111., to lie (speak 
 poy-k-kal, false leg. 
 poyi viclu, to depart. 
 p6yi-k-koiidu va, to fetch. 
 poyi-c-cer, to arrive. 
 poyyana, false. 
 poyj'anai, perjury. 
 pu, a blossom. 
 pu9al kattu, storm. 
 pii9a9ari, priest. 
 piicci, moth ; insect. 
 pu9U, to smear, plaster. 
 pudai, str., to n-innow. 
 pudai, str. ; adakkam pani.iu, 
 
 w., to bury. 
 pudan-kiramai, Wednesday. 
 pudavai, clot}t. 
 pudiday, ayiew. 
 pudi ya ; paccai, new, fresh. 
 pudu. neir. 
 
118 
 
 PUD 
 
 puduppi, str., to renew, reform. 
 pugjii, w., ainoke. 
 pugiii-k-kiKlu, chimneij. 
 pugiii-k-kudi, utr., to ftiuoke 
 
 (tobacco). 
 pugai-vai.idi, steaw car. 
 pugarcci ; tiidi, »., ]>raise. 
 pugaru, mil., to praise. 
 ))nl ; pulln, tp-afis. 
 puli, aciiUtif ; tamarind. 
 puli, t'ujir, cheetah. 
 pulippana, sour. 
 pulli, sjtot, a small cip/ier. 
 pulogam, the terrestrial icorh). 
 piinii, eartli. 
 
 pfuiii adirtal, eartliqnahe. 
 pum i kk u - k-klnl ua, under- 
 pun, a sore. \ff round. 
 
 pun, a kiioh, ferule. 
 puuiii. cat. 
 
 punct^y, ifyil cultivation. 
 pundu ; klnii, a shruh, herb. 
 [)uni.iiyam, virtue , merit. 
 pina, jn'i/eon. 
 (nimlu, ir., to roll. 
 piiraai, outside. 
 purambaiia, outward, e.vternal. 
 purambe, outside. 
 purai.ia, full, thoroutjli. 
 purai.iam, fulness; perfection. 
 piirappadii, ir., to jwoceed, start. 
 purappadu, departure. 
 pnratta^i, September- October. 
 purtti ; niraivu, fulness. 
 puru, worm. 
 puvukkam, sultriness. 
 pnrus, brnsh, 
 purushan, husband. 
 pnruvam, eyebrow. 
 pushel, bushel. 
 pusbtiyulla, stout, fat. 
 
 Tamil Grammar S.-T, 
 
 TAG 
 
 pustaga-t-tattn, bookshelf, 
 putti, stoutness, 
 putti, sc7ise ; intelii(/e7ice 
 pntticali, a wise man. 
 puttiyiJlfida, senseless. 
 puttiylnam, nonsense. 
 puttiyulla, sensible. 
 puttu, (i) n., a lock: {2)v.m., 
 
 to fasten, lock. 
 puyam, the arm. 
 
 [For words etyniologically beginning 
 with Jf, see' Ar, Ir and Ur.] 
 
 Rficciyam, kini/dom. 
 
 rappar ; orbi^iu, India-rubber. 
 
 ratial, pound. 
 
 rekku, rake. 
 
 reiiiba ; romba, much. 
 
 ridi, manner. 
 
 rodai, ir/ieel. 
 
 roL-am, disease. 
 
 rokkaii), rcadij money, 
 
 rotti. bread. 
 
 rubay, rupee. 
 
 T\\(f\, n., taste. 
 
 rucn, jiroof. 
 
 rnikkaiiibu, ruler. 
 
 Ta (S 89), (/ive. See taru. 
 taccan, carpenter. 
 tadai, obstacle, bar. 
 tadi, (1) a stick; (2) wm,., to cut 
 dt)W7i; (3) str., to thicken. 
 tadiman, w., cold (in the head). 
 tada, str., to prevent, rheck. 
 tadumbu, m. ; kariii puran- 
 
 dodu, m., to overflow. 
 tagada, impn'oper. 
 tagadu, a jdate. 
 tagaivilan, a swallow. 
 tagam, heat, thirst, 
 
114 
 
 TAG 
 
 tagappan ; appan, a fatJier. 
 
 ta<,^aram, a tin. 
 
 tagu, ir., to be Jit. 
 
 tagudi, fitness. 
 
 tagiidiyana, suitable, jwoper. 
 
 tai, Januanj-Februarij ; v.str., 
 
 taiyatkaran, tailor. [to sew. 
 
 takkali, tomato. 
 
 talai, head. 
 
 taliii- Mie9ai-k-katti, carvimi- 
 
 talili-novn, headac/te. [knife. 
 
 taliiippa, turban 
 
 talaivan, a lieadman. 
 
 taliiiyanai, pilloir. 
 
 taliiiyari, headman of the vil- 
 
 lu'/e, bailiff. 
 taliiiyodu, the skull. 
 talaiii, place, floor. [totter. 
 lalambu, m. ; tallfidu, m., to 
 taiii-vidu, ir., to dismiss. 
 taiiu,?//., to push; refuse, reject. 
 talu, tfie palate, tomjne. 
 taliika, division of a district. 
 tamadam ; tamaQam, delay. 
 tamadamana, slow. 
 tamadi, str., to limjer, delay. 
 tamarai, lotus. 
 tambalar, tumbler. 
 tambi, brother (younyer). 
 tan, self. 
 
 tanadu padai, private road. 
 tandai, father. 
 
 tandam, staff; punishment, fine. 
 tai^di, str., to punish. 
 tandiramana, cunning. 
 tangai ; -cci, sister (younyer). 
 fcangam, ]mre gold. 
 tangi ; adaravii, a support. 
 taiigu, m., to remain. 
 taiigu, m. ; 9Uina, swi., to bear, 
 tani, wm., to subside, \support. 
 
 TAY 
 
 taiii, str., to be alone, In de- 
 taniiuai, sinyleness. [serted. 
 taiiimaiyana, solitary. 
 tanitta ; vevverana, separate. 
 taniyam, grain, cereals. 
 taiiiye, alone. 
 tanmai, nature, quality. 
 tannir; jalam, cold water. 
 tannlr-iodai, water-wheel. 
 tannir totti, water -tub. 
 tapal ; taval, post, mail. 
 tapalil podu, to post. 
 tapal-cavadi , post-office. 
 tapal-muttirai, postage stamps, 
 tapal-karan, postman. 
 tappi d am , )n istake . 
 tappidamana ; kett i , wrong. 
 tappip po, to escape. 
 tappu, m., to miss: escape. 
 tarui, earth, land. 
 taram ; tara, a wife. 
 taram irandavau, widower. 
 taricii, fallow land. 
 tariitiram, pocerty. 
 tarpj ill ; tirangu, a bolt. 
 ta?nia-kartta, the icarden of a 
 
 tem]de. 
 tarn (p. J 9, No. 16), to give. 
 tarumam, virtue; alms. 
 tattiliyana, flat. 
 tattan, goldsmith. 
 tattu, (1) v.m., to rap, Jc7wckf 
 
 tap, pat; (2) n.. a knock. 
 tattu, shelf; tray ; platfoi-m ; 
 tavaliii, frog. [storey, floor. 
 tavaniii podu; kadattu, ??i., to 
 tavaru, m., to slip, [postpone. 
 tavir, wm., to be removed. 
 tavira ; oriya, except. 
 tay ; amma, mother, 
 tayar, ready. 
 
TAY 
 
 tayavu, kindness, favour. 
 
 teyfintaram, foreign countnj. 
 
 t69am, cotnitnj. 
 
 te9a-p-padaiii, map. 
 
 te^'ilv-kily; elumiccam param, 
 lime (fruit). 
 
 te-p-p6ccn, teapot. 
 
 tedi, ilai/ of the in n nth. 
 
 tedu, ?«.; aray, wm.., to search. 
 
 tekka-maram, teak. 
 
 tel, scorpion. 
 
 teli, (1) wm., to become clear ; 
 (2), str., to clear; sprinkle. 
 
 teliiida, clear. 
 
 telivaua, eridnnt. 
 
 teiivay, distincthf, 
 
 teilu, m., to sift. 
 
 ten ; tetku, south. 
 
 ten, honey. 
 
 ten^'fiy, a cocoanut. 
 
 tenl, bee. 
 
 tenna-aiaram, cocoanut tree. 
 teural, south wind. [stood. 
 teri, wm., to be known, undrr- 
 terind'e(]ii, str., to select, choose. 
 terippu, information, commu- 
 nication, [confide. 
 tern, m., .to recover; improve; 
 tettara, anwietj/. 
 tettam, certaintij. 
 te-t-tai.n.ilr, tea (beverage). 
 teviiii, need. 
 
 teviiiyay irii, sm., to want. 
 tevan, god. 
 tevastanani, a temple. 
 tey, (1) wm., to wear away; (2) 
 
 str., to rub. 
 tey-k-karandi, tea-spoon. 
 teyiltii, tea (leaf). 
 ticai, qjiarter of the heaven. 
 tigixippu, alarm. 
 
 116 
 
 TIR 
 
 tlmai, evil, vice. 
 
 tinjii, place ; class. 
 
 tinam, a day. 
 
 tiiigat-kiramai, Monday. 
 
 tlni, food. 
 
 tlni me9ai, dininy-table. 
 
 tlni-y-arai, dining-room. 
 
 tin, to eat, feed. 
 
 in-, (1), wm.., to end; (2) str., to 
 finish., decide. 
 
 tira, sm., to opeyi. 
 
 tirjii, curtain; a wrinkle, wave. 
 
 tiral. a ball; multitude; swarm. 
 
 tiralaga, abundantly. 
 tirand'edu ; avii'tt'edu, to un- 
 tiratca rayam, wine. [pack. 
 tiraviyam ; asti, riches. 
 tiravu, opening. 
 tiri, (1) n., a wick; (2) v.wm., 
 to wander about, revolve ; 
 (3) str., to twist. 
 tirmanam, a derision, resolii- 
 tlrmani, str., to resolve, [tion. 
 tlrttu-p-p6du, to settle. 
 tiru, sacred ; prosperity. 
 tirudan, a thief. 
 tirudii, m., to steal. 
 tirug'ani, n., a screw, [screw. 
 tirugani yidu ; murukkii, to 
 tirugani karattu, m., to unscrew. 
 tirumba {inf.) , again. 
 ti rumba adai, to recover (get 
 
 back). 
 tirumba-k-kodu, to restore. 
 tirumbu, m., to return. 
 tirnppn. m., to cause to turn; 
 to tr luslate. [tion. 
 
 tii'utti, sujfiriency, satisfac- 
 tiruttn, 7/7., to correct. 
 tiruttu, tJuift. 
 tiruttuttanam, dishonesty. 
 
116 
 
 TIR 
 
 tirvai, decidon ; tulU 
 tittam, accuracij. 
 tittaiiiaua, e.i-act, correct. 
 titiippaua ; iniya, siceet. 
 tittii, ///.; 6911, ni., to abuse. 
 tlvatti, torch. 
 tivu, an island. 
 todiii, the thigh. 
 todaiigu, ?//., to bef/in. 
 tO(lar, WW., to succeed, follow. 
 todariidu pidi, str., to overtake. 
 todu, (1) ir., to touch ; (2) str., 
 
 to connect. 
 togai ; togam, t<jtal, .sum, 
 tol, shoulder. • [amount. 
 
 toi, {l)n., skin; (2) v.w., to be 
 
 defeated. 
 tollayiram, ^line hundred. 
 tot-petti, porttnanteau. 
 tondai, throat. 
 tondaravu, trouble. 
 toiidu, m., to di<j; draw ivater. 
 toiigu, m., to hany, be sus- 
 tonimru, ninety. [pended. 
 
 tonru, m., to appear. 
 toppi, liat. 
 tord, occupation. 
 torn. n\, worship. 
 totta, cartrld;/e. 
 tottakkaran, gardener. 
 tottam, yarden : estate. 
 tottaui ; katei, appearance, view. 
 tottappadu, ir., to seem. 
 totti ; ] attal, a trough, cistern. 
 tottii, m., to appear. 
 toy, (1) wm., to hathe ; (2) str., 
 tu9i, dust. [to dip. 
 
 tuda', str., to wipe, rub. 
 tudnippam, a broom. 
 tiikkam ; tunbam, sorrow. 
 tukkam ; nittimi, sleep. 
 
 UDA 
 
 tukkan-koudadu, to mourn. 
 tukkii, )u.; edu, str., to lift, 
 
 raise. 
 tukkudi, division of a district. 
 tiikku-rodai, pulleys. 
 tiili, n., drop [of ivater); v.str., 
 
 to fall in drops. 
 tulir, (1) n., a bud; (2) v.str., 
 tumbi, elephant. [to bud. 
 
 tumbi-k-kai, elephant's trunk. 
 tummu, m., to sneeze. 
 tun ; kal, post, pillar. 
 tiinai, escort; aid. 
 twiidaga udai, wm.., to shatter. 
 tundu, piece. [sleep. 
 
 tmigu, m. ; nittirai 9ey, w., to 
 tuppa9i, interpreter. 
 tuppatti, a sheet of cloth. 
 tiir ; adi maram, root, stock. 
 turiii, a ford. 
 turiii, gentleman. 
 turai-9aui, a lady. 
 turam ; tolai, distance. 
 turidam, haste. 
 turu, rust. 
 
 turutti, hello} vs : water-bag. 
 tushtan, a rujfian. 
 tuslianain, n., abuse. 
 tuvakku, ni., to begi)-. 
 tuvalai, fiow of blood ; a towel. 
 
 Ubayaui, sclieme. 
 
 uccari, str., to pronounce. 
 
 lici, a )ieedle. 
 
 udadii, li/>. 
 
 udii', (1) wealt/i ; (2) garment; 
 
 (3) ivm., to burst, split. 
 udai, str., to kid:. 
 udaimai ; ndamai, jtossession, 
 udiliyavajLi. owner, [property. 
 udai], together with. 
 
UDA 
 
 ui^aue, immediatdij. 
 
 udanpadu, ayreemmt. 
 
 udarii, m., to f;hake. 
 
 udav i , assistance . 
 
 udavu, m., to relieve, ass'st. 
 
 udi, str., to rise (as the san). 
 
 udir, wni., to drop off. 
 
 udi rain, blood. 
 
 udu, .sir.; uduttu (ra//.s.), m., to 
 
 iidu, m., to blow. [clothe. 
 
 udukkira arai, dressimj-rooni. 
 
 udiippu-k-karattu, w., to un- 
 
 U(Juppu, clothing. [dress. 
 
 udiippu me^iii, dressing-table. 
 
 ul ; ulle, within. 
 
 ulagam, the world. 
 
 ulai, furnace. 
 
 ularu, wni., to become dry. 
 
 ulla, containing y possessing ; 
 
 uiifin, snipe. [real. 
 
 uiiah kal, sole (of the foot). 
 
 uiiana, inward. 
 
 uiiapadi, actually, in reality. 
 
 uiiavan, possessor. 
 
 uiie, within, among. 
 
 uii, a chisel. 
 
 u I obam , coveto usness. 
 
 ulukkaru, %mn., to sit down. 
 
 uiundu, beauj gram. 
 
 urn, and ; also. 
 
 uini, husk. 
 
 un, w., to eat; enjoy ; suffer. 
 
 unam, defect. 
 
 unap paduttu, ni., to maim. 
 
 unar, um., to feel. 
 
 unarcci , consciousness. 
 
 m^arccillada, insensible. 
 
 undai, a ball. 
 
 ui.idiyal, bill of earhange. 
 
 undu, there is. 
 
 uumai ; nermiii, hon 
 
 117 
 UYI 
 
 I ui;iiiaiyulla, sincere. 
 imru, ///., to lean on. 
 uppaua; iivar, adj., salt. 
 uppu, salt. 
 ur, rillage. 
 uriii, case, cover. 
 urakkam, sleep. 
 ural, a mortar. 
 uram, strength. 
 urauiulla, tough. 
 uraiigu, m., to sleep. 
 urui.ii, village tank. 
 uravu, relationship. [off. 
 
 uri (act.d'neut.)^ to peel; to strip 
 uri, skin. 
 urittana, peculiar. 
 urittay-iru, sm., to own. 
 uriya, belonging to. 
 uru, wm., to crawl. 
 uru-pa(Jai, a plough. 
 uru, w., to plough. 
 urubu, form. 
 urudi, firmness. 
 urudiyulla, durable. 
 urudiyana tirkkamana, posi- 
 uru- kay, pickles. [tive. 
 
 urulai-k-kirangu, potato. 
 uruttu, m., to cause to feel. 
 ushnam, heat. 
 utir, str., to shed, cast. 
 utkaru, ivm., to sit. [ment). 
 ut-katcattai, drawers {ifar- 
 uttamam, the best, [^permission. 
 uttaravu, command; answer; 
 uttiyogam, profession, ofiice. 
 uttu, source (of river), spring. 
 uyar, wm., to become high. 
 uyaram, height. 
 uyaramfina, high. [n., life. 
 uyir, str., to live, breathe; 
 uyirulla, adj., live, living. 
 
118 
 
 VA 
 
 Ya (p. 49, No. 17), come. 
 
 vacadi, arcuinnunlation. 
 
 vaeadiyaua, comfortable. 
 
 vacal, a f/atc. 
 
 va9am, suhjection ; charge. 
 
 va9aiiai ; manam, odour. 
 
 vacci, adze. 
 
 va9ik6ttu, waistcoat. 
 
 va9i, sty*. ; padi, sfr., to read. 
 
 vada ; vadakku, north. 
 
 vadagai, n., rent, hire. 
 
 vadagaikku edu, to hire. 
 
 vadai, noi-th wind. 
 
 vadam, rheumathm. 
 
 vadi, wm., to trickle; str., to 
 
 drain. 
 vadi; varakkali, complaiiiant; 
 
 plaintiff. 
 vadikattu, to strain, filter. 
 vadu, m., to fade. 
 vadivu, shape, Jifjure: hiauty. 
 vagal; murai, jjrocess. 
 vagaira ; vagaiyara, belonging 
 
 to, et cetera. 
 vai, (1) w., to abase; (2) str., 
 
 to set, place, put. 
 vai9uri, small-po.c. 
 vaicuri kiittu, m., to vaccinate, 
 vaigaci, May -June. 
 vairakkiyam, asceticism. 
 vaittiyan, doctor. 
 vaittu-k-kol, to retain. 
 vakkiyam, a sentence. 
 vakknttattam, n., a promise. 
 vakkattattam 9ey, w., to pro- 
 val, tail. [)nise. 
 
 val, a saw ; sword. 
 vaiadu, adj., right {-hand). 
 valiii, WW., to bend. 
 valiii, a net. 
 valar, win., to rear, grow. 
 
 VAR 
 
 vali, (1) n., power, strength ; 
 (2) r.wm., to be ejcited, to 
 
 force ; (3) str., to ache, row 
 valiban, youngman. [(a boat). 
 valiba-p-peii, young tvoman, 
 valimai, strength. 
 vallamai, might, jmwer, 
 vanam, sky. 
 
 vanangu, m., to worship, 
 vana vil, raiyibow. 
 vandi, a carriage. 
 vandibedi, cholera, 
 vanga, trumpet. 
 vangu ; palagai, a bench, 
 vangu,^ 7n., to obtain, buy. 
 vafijanai, deceit. 
 van kori, turkey. 
 vaiinan, washerman. 
 var, wm., to live. 
 var, (1) n., a strap, thong ; (2) 
 
 v.wm., to flow ; (S) str., to 
 
 pour, cast in a mould. 
 varagan, a pagoda coin. 
 varaik-kay or varaip-paj'am, 
 
 plantain, banana. 
 varaiyum ; mattum, until. 
 varakkadu, to prosecute. 
 varakkam, habit, usage, custom. 
 varakkam illada, unusual. 
 varakku, a dispute, case {law). 
 varal, a coming. 
 varam, a week. 
 varaiidu, warrant. 
 varangu, ?//., to be in use. 
 varavu, receipt. 
 varavu pai-, str., to anticipate. 
 vari [vulg.ibiiw), way, road. 
 vari, (1) a line, tax; (2) v. wm.<(: 
 
 str., to draw lines, paint : 
 
 bind. 
 variciii ; oruiigu, order, ranh-. 
 
119 
 
 VAK 
 
 vari-kattu, m., to guide. 
 vari-p-pokkas, a traveller^ 
 
 jiassenger. [ntray. 
 
 vari-tappu, m., to miss the road, 
 varkkiii, life ; felicity. 
 varnam, w., colour ; tribe. 
 vari.ii, Htr.^ to paint , depict. 
 varttagan; viyapari, merchant. 
 varttai, a icord, sentence. 
 vartti, a wick, torch. 
 vartti-t-tandu, a candlestick. 
 vara (p. 49, No. 17), to come. 
 varumpadi, income. 
 varusham, a year. 
 varushantaiam, annually. 
 vataculili, ijout. 
 vattam, a circle ; exchange of 
 vatti, interest. [money. 
 
 vatti; podikkiravan, a teacher. 
 vattu, ?/i., to dry up. (cans, of 
 vattii rott-i, toast. [vadu. 
 
 vattu ; tara, duck. 
 vaya9u ; vayadu, age. 
 vayadu (;enra> ag^d. 
 vayal ; veli, field. 
 vay, mouth. 
 vayin gilils, wine-glass. 
 vayiru ; iriiippai, the stomach. 
 vayittulaivu , dysentery. 
 vaykkal, tretich. 
 vayppirappu, a declaration. 
 ve, wm.y to burn. 
 ve9ari, a mule. 
 vedi, (1) an e.vplosion of a gun; 
 
 (2) v.str., to explode, burst. 
 vedi marundu, gunpoicder. 
 vedi tokku, gun. 
 vegu, wuch. 
 vegumadi, rexcard. 
 vegumanam ; 9andosham, 
 vel, white. [gift, present. 
 
 VIB 
 
 vel, a dart. 
 
 velai, work, employment. 
 
 velai, time; occasion. 
 
 velai cey, to work. 
 
 velaikkaran, labourer, servant. 
 
 velaikku amarttu,?w., to engage 
 for work. 
 
 veli, a hedge; a land measure 
 about 5 acres. 
 
 veliccam ; oli, n., light. 
 
 veiippaduttu, m.. to reveal. 
 
 veiiye, outside. 
 
 veilili ; vellaiyana, white. 
 
 veiiam, a flood. 
 
 veiiari, cucumber. [[Venus). 
 
 veiii, silver; evening star; 
 
 veiii-k-kiramai, Friday. 
 
 vendu (§ 47, c). require. 
 
 vengayam, onion. 
 
 veil- gal, quartz. 
 
 ver, (1) n., a root; (2) v.str., 
 to sweat ; be angry. 
 
 ver'enge-y-avadu, elsewhere. 
 
 veri, (1) n., drunkenness, con- 
 fusion; (2) v.wm., to be 
 urged; (3) str., to be drunk. 
 
 veritta, drunk. 
 
 veriyillada, sober. 
 
 vera, other, different. 
 
 verumaiyana, empty. 
 
 veruppu, disgust. 
 
 vetkam, shame. 
 
 vetti, cloth {of an Indian). 
 
 vetti-p-podu, to cut down. 
 
 vettii, m., to cut, chop; dig. 
 
 vettu vay, n., a cutting, gash. 
 
 vettu-k-katti, billhook. 
 
 vettu-k-kili, locust. 
 
 vevveray, separately, apa/rt. 
 
 veyil, sunshine. 
 
 viba9a^am, agriculture. 
 
120 
 
 VIO 
 
 vicai, spring, tri(j;/ei\ 
 vi9anam, sorrow, anxiety. 
 vi9ana-p-paduttii, m., to cause 
 
 sorrow, vex, disjilcase. 
 vi9araiiai ; 9odauai, trial. 
 vi9ari, str., to inquire. [tio7i. 
 vi9esham, peculiar it jj, distinc- 
 viceshamana ; apurVamaua, 
 vi9iri, a fan. [unconnnon. 
 
 viccarival, sci/the. 
 vi9ukkottu, biscuit. 
 vidai, str., to sow. 
 vidiii ; vittu ; kottai, sml. 
 vidam, rate. 
 
 vidam ; vagili, Jciud, manner. 
 videyan, one who is obedient. 
 vidi, w}n., to dawn. 
 vidi velli, morning star. 
 vidiyal ; vidiyat-kalam, day- 
 vidu, home, house. \break. 
 
 vidu, //•., to leave. 
 vidudi, leave. 
 vidiivi, xtr.,- to releajie. 
 vikk nam, an impediment. 
 vil, n., a bow. 
 vil, w., to sell. 
 vila-v-elambu, rib, 
 viliii, price. 
 
 vilai kel, to bid, offer a price. 
 vilai 90I, to charge. 
 vilagu, m.; piiiiiidu, ir., to re- 
 vilaiyiTdii, m.., to play. [tire. 
 viiai3ulla, dear [costhj). 
 vilakku, lamp. 
 vilambaram, notice. 
 vli.i ; vinaiia, adj., vain. 
 vinay, vainly. 
 vinnappain, a petition. 
 viraga, fuel. 
 virai, str., to become stiff or 
 
 numb. 
 
 Printed by J ihn Ro»E|ITS Prkss Ltd, 
 
 r.9. #89 «, 
 
 YUT 
 
 viraitta ; a^aiyiida, stiff. 
 viraivana, fast, rapid. 
 virai vu, speed. 
 viral, finger. 
 virfinda, verandah. 
 viri, wm. d- str., to open, unfold. 
 virodamay, in opposition, 
 virodi, enemy. [against. 
 
 virtti ; virutti, increase, growth, 
 
 wealth. 
 viru, wm., to fall do an. 
 virumbu, m., to wish, desire. 
 virundu, a feast ; a guest. 
 virundukk'arai, str., to invite. 
 virungu, ;;/., to swallow. 
 vishabedi, cholera. 
 vishani, venom. 
 vitka-t-takka, saleable. 
 vitpanai, Kale. 
 vittiya9am, difference. 
 vittu vidu, to relinqui^Ji ; omit. 
 vittu-p-po, to leave. 
 viyabaram, merchandise, trade. 
 viyadi, disease. 
 viyadiyulla, ill. 
 viyagulam ; tunbam, distress. 
 viyarak-kiramai, Thursday. 
 
 Yad'oiiru, whatever. 
 yad'oruvan, anyone. 
 yanai, an elephant. 
 yar ; ar, who. 
 yar analum, whoever. 
 yokkiyam, %vhat is fitting. 
 yomiyadar, grantee, pensioner. 
 yugi ; yogi, str., to weditatc, 
 
 reason. 
 yurimar ; pancayattar, jury. 
 yutta9ali, a warrior. 
 yuttam ; 9andai, war. 
 yutti, reasoning; propriety. 
 
COMPANION VOLUMES 
 
 KXJRIVIESE. 
 
 ilirmese Self-Taught (Thimm's System) [in Burmese and Roman Oharao. 
 ters] by R. F. St A. 8L JOHN, Hon. M.A. (Oxon.), sometime Uoturer 
 , on Burmese, Oxford University. 
 
 Crown Svo. blue wrapper. 51- net : red cloth. 61- net. 
 
 GUJARATI. 
 
 Ijarati Self-Taught, (Iti (-.ujarati and Roman characters) by N. M. DHRUVA, 
 Crasia College, Condal (Kathiawar, India). 
 
 Containing- Alphabet and pronunciation, classified vocabularies, Travelling: by Railway 
 Commercial. Fishing and Shooting Terms, Outline of Grammar, Exercises for translation. 
 Money and Weights &c. 
 
 Crown 8vo, blue wrapper, 3/6 net ; red cloth, 4/6 net. 
 
 alay Self-Taught. By MAJID, ABDUL (Acting^ Headmaster, Malay Trainmg 
 College, Matang). In Roman and Arabic characters.) 
 
 ;itrc>duction, the Malay characters (Arabic), Malay Spelling, British Malaya, Classifiird 
 • ocabularies, Tin Mining, Rubber Planting, Grammatical Notes, containiag the Rules of 
 
 i;.e Grammar of Malay, Punctuation, InHections, &c. Sentences in English and Malay 
 Romanized) with Phonetic Pronunciation of the Malay words, as Exercises on the 
 
 Grammar. Conversations for Shopping at Native Shops, Miners and Planters; with the 
 
 Police; A Case — Trial in Court, &c. 
 
 Crown 8vo, blue wrapper, 3/- ; red cloth, 4/- 
 
 [arlboroutfh's TRAVELLERS* PRACTICAL MANUALS OF 
 
 CONVERSATION. 
 
 (BUBXEOTB ABBAKQED ▲liPHABETIOiOiliY.) 
 
 Containing Trarel Notes, Classified Conversations— Railway, Steamer, Hotel. Luggac*, 
 j Customs, Shopping, Sight-seeing, Motoring, Cycling, «fec. Money, Weights and 
 [Measures. Comprehensive Dictionary of Words in Daily Use. 
 
 Ho. 1. ENGLISH, FRENCH, GERMAN and ITALIAN. {In one book.) 
 Ho. 2. ENGLISH, FRENCH, GERMAH and DUTCH. (In one book.) 
 Crown 12mo, wrapper, 1/9 net each; cloth, 3/- net each. 
 
 (AVELLERS* ESPERANTO MANUAL OF CONVERSATION. 
 
 English-Esperanto. 
 
 By J. C. O'CONNOK, m.a., ph.d. Containing Pronuneiation, The Accent, The Article, 
 Classified Conversations (subjects arranged alphabetically)— Railway, Steamer, Hotel, 
 Afc., Forma of Letters, Tables of Money, with the English equivalents and 
 Esperanto equivalents, Weights and Measures, The Numerals, Comprehensive 
 Vocabulary of words in daily use. 
 
 Crown lamo. Green olotta. la. nat. Wrapper. 8d. naa 
 
 mion : E. MARLBOROUGH & Co., Pablishers, 51 Old Bailey, E.C. 4. 
 
Mariborough-s Self -Taught Sericfi 
 
 For STUDENTS and TRAVELLERS. 
 Co:. tains classified Yocabularies, useful Phrases and Conversatio 
 with the ENGLISH PHONETIC PRONUNCIATION of every wc 
 so arranged that ihey may be learned AT A GLANCE. 
 
 Prices Net 
 
 Cloth 
 ARABIC (Syrian) SelfTaught 4 - 
 BURMESE 6- 
 
 CHINESE .. 6- 
 
 DANISH 4- 
 
 DUTCH 4- 
 
 EGYPTIAN (Arabic)., 4- 
 
 ESPERANTO 
 
 FINNISH 
 
 FRENCH 
 
 GERMAN 
 
 GREEK Modem) 
 
 GUJARATI 
 
 HINDUSTANI 
 
 HUNGARIAN 
 
 3- 
 4- 
 3- 
 3- 
 4- 
 4/6 
 4- 
 4- 
 
 Wrap. 
 
 3- 
 
 5- 
 
 46 
 
 3- 
 
 3;. 
 
 3- 
 2- 
 
 3/- 
 
 2- 
 
 2/. 
 
 3- 
 
 36 
 
 3- 
 
 3- 
 
 Prices Ni 
 
 Cloth \V 
 
 ITALIAN Self Taught 3- 
 
 JAPANESE 4- 
 
 LATIN 3- 
 
 MALAY « 4- 
 
 NORWEGIAN . 4- 
 
 PERSIAN 4- 
 
 PORTUGUESE.. 4 
 
 RUSSIAN 4 
 
 SERBO-CROATIAN 4 6 
 
 SINHALESE 
 
 SPANISH 
 
 SWEDISH 
 
 TAMIL 
 
 TURKISH 
 
 GRAMMARS 
 
 FRENCH GRAMMAR by J, LAFimE.B.es-L 
 
 GERMAN .. by \V. E. Weber. M.A 
 
 HINDUSTANI .. by S. Bilgrami. M.A. 
 
 ITALIAN .. by A. C. Paxagulli 
 
 JAPANESE .. byH.J.WMviz 
 
 SPANISH .. by ANDRES], R.V. Garcia ... 
 
 TAM I L .. by DOX M. dc ZiLVA WlCKRliMASIXGHS 
 
 SELF=TAUQHT PHRASE BOOK AND GRAMMAR. 
 
 6- - 
 
 6' - 
 
 7/6 - 
 
 6 - 
 
 8/6 - 
 
 6/ - 
 
 86 - 
 
 In one Volume.) 
 FRENCH Seif-Taught and Grammar with Key 
 GERMAN 
 HINDUSTANI .. 
 ITALIAN 
 
 JAPANESE ., - 
 
 SPANISH 
 TAMIL 
 
 HOME STUDY SERIES 
 
 (Contains Self-Taught Grammar and Key to the Exercises.) 
 
 FRENCH by Home Study, by j, LAFi-rna. H. es-L ^ ^ 
 
 GERMAN .. .. byW. E. Wkber, M.A ^ 
 
 ITALIAN .. ,. by G. Dalla Vecchia & A. C. PANAGULU ^ 
 
 SPANISH n .. by ANDRES J. R. V. G.ARCiA ... ^ ^ ^ 
 
 ENGLISH SELF-TAUGHT. 
 
 For the FRENCH ... L'ANGLAIS SANS MaItRE ... -. 
 
 GERMANS ^. DERENGLISCHE DOLMETSCHER 
 
 ITALIANS ... L'INGLESE IMPARATO DASE 
 
 SPANIARDS... EL INGLES PARA CADA CUAL ... 
 
 RUSSIANS ... CaMov'iHTe.ii) aEr.iiwcKaro J!;^i>iKa. ... 
 
 Otb.er Volumes are to bei'^sued, includin.* Bengali Self-Tau^h'. &c, 
 
 London ;—E. MARLBOROUGH & Co., Publishers, 51, Old Bailey, K.C.< 
 
 — 
 
 4/ 
 4/ 
 
 4/ 
 
 3 
 
 2/ 
 
 3 
 
 2 
 
 3 
 
 2/ 
 
 3- 
 
 2/ 
 
 3 
 
 2/ 
 
 JEWS 
 
RETURN TO the circulation desk of any 
 
 University of California Library 
 
 or to the 
 
 NORTHERN REGIONAL LIBRARY FACILITY 
 BIdg. 400, Richnnond Field Station 
 University of California 
 Richmond, CA 94804-4698 
 
 ALL BOOKS MAY BE RECALLED AFTER 7 DAYS 
 2-nnonth loans may be renewed by calling 
 
 (415)642-6233 
 1-year loans may be recharged by bringing books 
 
 to NRLF 
 Renewals and recharges may be made 4 days 
 
 prior to due date 
 
 DUE AS STAMPED BELOW 
 
 omm 
 
 KfcCtlVcD BY 
 
 DEC 1'^ 19^8 
 
 Ot SANTA CSUZ 
 
GENERAL LIBRARY - U.C. BERKELEY 
 
 B00Q183bD5